Physical Design and Technology Development of CSNS TS&NI For NTAC

Physical Design and Technology Development of CSNS Target Station and Instruments
Physics Design and Technology
Development of CSNS Target Station
and Instruments
Second CSNS International Neutron Technology Advisory

Committee Review Meeting
Institute of High Energy Physics, Institute of Physics, CAS

April, 2010, Beijing, China
CONTENTS
Page
1 TARGET STATION...............................................................................1
1.1 INTRODUCTION OF TARGET DESIGN ..................................................................................... 2
1.2 PHYSICAL WORKS OF CSNS TARGET STATION .................................................................... 8
1.3 TARGET SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 30
1.4 MODERATOR AND REFLECTOR ............................................................................................. 42
1.5 HELIUM VESSEL ....................................................................................................................... 59
1.6 SHIELDING ................................................................................................................................. 70
1.7 REMOTE HANDLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 84
1.8 CRYOGENIC SYSTEM............................................................................................................... 92
2 NEUTRON INSTRUMENTS ........................................................... 115

2.1 HIGH INTENSITY POWDER DIFFRACTOMETER ............................................................... 116
2.2 MULTI-PURPOSE REFLECTOMETER ................................................................................... 125
2.3 SMALL-ANGLE NEUTRON-SCATTERING INSTRUMENT ................................................ 132
2.4 SAMPLE ENVIRONMENTS .................................................................................................... 154
2.5 NEUTRON OPTICS .................................................................................................................. 168
2.6 NEUTRON DETECTION .......................................................................................................... 177
2.7 DATA ACQUISITION ................................................................................................................ 187
3 EXPERIMENTAL CONTROL AND UTILITY.............................198

3.1 EXPERIMENTAL CONTROL .................................................................................................. 199
3.2 EXPERIMENTAL UTILITY...................................................................................................... 205
1 TARGET STATION
1
1.1 INTRODUCTION OF TARGET DESIGN

Xuejun Jia (Xuejun.jia@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
1.1.1 Description of target station

The function of the target station is to convert a short pulse, high energy
(>1-GeV) proton beam into lower-energy (< 1 eV), short-pulsed neutron beams
optimized for use by neutron scattering instruments. The interaction between the
pulsed high-energy proton beam with the heavy metal target produces the fast
neutrons through the spallation reaction. Then the fast neutron will be moderated into
short pulsed, high peak flux cold, thermal and epithermal neutrons by moderators
(ambient water, cryogenic H2 at 20K etc.) and reflector, and transported down the
beam tubes to the neutron instrument hall for neutron scattering experiments. In
CSNS target station design, the target will take 100kW, 1.6GeV proton beam from the
accelerator, and provide 18 neutron beam lines for the neutron scattering experiments.
Table 1.1-1gives the technical design of CSNS target station.
Table 1.1-1. Technical Design of CSNS target station

Beam power on 100 （200）
target [kW]
Target Tungsten clad by tantalum, cooling by heavy water (H2O
first)
Moderators Decoupled H2O (300K), decoupled and poisoned H2(20K),
coupled H2(20K)
Reflector Be/Fe (Φ700/1000X1000mm) , D2O cooling
Shielding 5m iron+ 1m heavy concrete, no outer vessel concept
TMR maintenance Target- Moderator - Reflector (TMR) horizontal maintenance
Neutron beam port Vertical shutter system, neutron guide inserts
Helium vessel helium vessel (SS316, AlMg3 for proton and neutron
window),
Utility system Maintenance trolley, Underground settlement ,separate
ventilation systems
Waste Hot-cell and basement storage well, transfer flask transport
management
Target station systems include target system, moderators, reflector, shielding,

utilities, and maintenance systems as shown in Table 1.1-2. Operational availability is
a major objective in the target system design, as the system is a key element in an
2
experimental support facility. CSNS will operate 5000 hours per year; and the design
lifetime of the target station is 40 years. Due to the radiation damage of the materials,
some key components like target, moderators have only the lifetime about 3-5 years.
The remote handling system will provide equipment to support the disposal of
contaminated and activated waste generated from the target systems. This includes the
replacement, transport and final storage of the used target, moderators and proton
beam window and so on. The design lifetime of the remote handling system will be 50
year. All the target system design has to be performed in accordance with the National
Standards for Engineering Design of Standard Industrial, Radiological.
Table 1.1-2 target station systems constitution

Target and cooling Target material，target, cooling structure, vessel etc.
Moderator and reflector Coupled, decoupled H2 and water moderators, Be and
Fe reflector
Cryogenic system He refrigerator, H2 circulation system and H2 safety
Helium vessel Helium vessel, proton beam window interface, neutron
windows and horizontal maintenance trolley
Shielding（shutters） Bulk shielding, 18 beam port and shutters
Remote handling Remote handling tools, hot-cell and service area,
basement and service tunnel, waste management
Control system Target station control, monitoring
Utility Heavy and light water cooing system, ventiliation,
power, vacuum and helium gas, cover gas system etc.
1.1.2 CSNS Target station design

Figure 1.1-1 shows a cutaway view of the target station. The proton beam enters
horizontally at 1.8 m above the floor level. The target station is primarily located
along the center of the target building with the solid tungsten target positioned
approximately 24 m from the point of beam entry. The target is surrounded by a 1m in
diameter heavy-water cooled beryllium and iron reflector, with two moderators (one
decoupled ambient water moderator plus one decoupled and poisoned supercritical
hydrogen cryogenic moderator) above the target and one coupled supercritical
hydrogen cryogenic moderator below the target. The helium vessel system encloses
the Target-moderator-reflector assembly (TMR) to limit the production of activated
gas, to provide hydrogen gas containment in case of a cryogenic moderator failure.
Outside the helium vessel, the surrounding radiation bulk shielding (including the
neutron beam shutters) extends to a radius of approximately 6 m with 5m steels plus 1
meter heavy concrete, and this keep the radiation dose level below 2.5μSv/h
following the national standards to provide the safe working environment for
3
operators , instrument scientists and users.
Top concrete Shutters

shielding
Shutters
driver
concrete
shielding
Steel
shielding
Shutter
insert
PBW
RTBT interface Instrument
interface
TMR Helium Base plate

Target ground vessel
Fig. 1.1-1. Cutaway view of target station
For the remote handling system, the horizontal trolley that contains all the core
target components (ISIS concept) initially appears to be the most obvious choice. This
arrangement places all the active components in a single assembly that can be easily
retracted into the target remote handling cell. It also reduces the complexity of the
shielding and reduces the need for overhead handling. In CSNS Target station design，
The CSNS target team has chosen an all-horizontal target/moderator/reflector
arrangement, as shown in Fig.1.1-2.
The Remote Handling requirements will dominate the layout of the target area.
In general, the maintenance tasks for CSNS can be divided into two types. First case
is associated with the Target-moderator-reflector (TMR) replacements, the activation
and contamination levels will be very high, and these works has to be done in hot-cell
by through-wall manipulators. The second case is about the TMR associated utility
system , like water (heavy and light water)cooling loops, components will normally
not have significant amounts of contamination, and most of work could by done by
hands on with appropriate additional radiation protection means in the service area.
4
Fig. 1.1-2. CSNS horizontal maintenance trolley
A dedicated hot cell will be located behind the target monolith for the purpose of
maintaining the TMR assembly and helium vessel (neutron windows). The hot-cell
size is about 5 m in width, 5 m in length and 6.0 m in height. The service area is
Located behind the hot-cell, housing the horizontal trolley with almost all of utilities
system for the target station. This service area will be designed to have maximum
flexibility and will therefore be used for both fully remote and hands-on operations
needed to support hands-on maintenance of all water cooling system components and
part of the cryogenic system. The cell will measure 9 m in width, 24.5 m in length,
and 8 m in height, the cutaway of target station and maintenance cells is shown in Fig.
1.1-3.
The target shielding requirements around the proton beam entry point, and the
physical size of service area shielding, allow an angle of 110 degree on either side of
the target station for the neutron beam lines. These will be equally spaced with
separation of about 12 degree for 9 beam lines at both sides, totally with 18 beam
lines. Each line will have an independently operable shielding shutter under the
control of the experimenters. The beam lines will be located at two levels: six lines
directed at the ambient water moderator, and six beam lines towards to the decoupled
and poisoned cryogenic H2 moderator above the target, and six at the cryogenic
moderators under the target. The shielding will extend to a radius of 9 m at the beam
line level, providing a region for the neutron beam choppers with a vertical access
hatch positioned at a radius of about 7 m. The neutron beam line shielding forms the
interface between the target systems and the scattering instruments in this region
5
8.75m Maintenance Cell
Target Station Remote Handling

Core Hot Cell TMR
Center Trolley
Vessel
Fig. 1.1-3. Cutaway of target station and maintenance cells
Figures 1.1-4 provide detailed information on the configuration of the major

areas of the target station facility. The size of the instrument hall is approximately 85
m by 70 m. The target is located on the ground level along with the instrument hall,
general maintenance hot-cell, service area and auxiliary service area. Under the
service area, there is also a basement designed for the utility system and long term
wastes storage.
Equipment Passage 6m
Gallery Gateway
Hot Cell
User Lab
(3 Floors) Maintenance Cell
Auxiliary Service Area

No.1 Exptl Hall
50T CRANE 1
Hall Floor
TS
30T CRANE 2
PROTON BEAM
Neutron Beam Line
No.2 Exptl Hall
Scattering Room Helium Compressor Room
Gas Room
Fig. 1.1-4. Layout of target station hall
A 50 T crane will serve the target station hall along the whole length from the
proton beam transport tunnel inside to the target station service area. There will be
6
two instruments halls with 30m×70m, 35m x70m for either side of the target station
for the neutron beam line and instruments, each served by a 30 T crane. Each of the
instruments will also have a 1T crane for smaller items. 3 of the planned longer beam
lines will have their own buildings outside the main hall.
1.1.3 Upgrade path

The upgrade plan for CSNS is to increase the power level to 200kW in the first
target station, and eventually go to 500kW with the second target station. The ability
to upgrade the target systems to double its power has been considered in the design
process.
Because of the relatively minor impact on the cost and schedule for initial design
and installation compared with the serious difficulty of retrofitting after initial
operations, the target systems shielding, utility piping, target helium vessels,
cryogenic system and reflector systems are designed and installed with 200kW
capability.
7
1.2 PHYSICAL WORKS OF CSNS TARGET STATION

Tianjiao Liang(tjliang@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
As the neutron source part of CSNS, the physical function of target station is to
convert the high energy proton output from accelerator to low energy neutron (1eV-
0.1meV) optimized for neutron scattering instruments. There are some physical
works for the design, commission, operation and upgrade of target station which are
as follows:
-Target-moderator-reflector(TMR) neutronics design and optimization
-Shielding Analysis
-Activation calculation
-Radiation damage calculation
-Energy deposition calculation
-Neutronics performance measurement
-Physical interface with accelerator and instruments
1.2.1 TMR design & neutronics performance

The goal of TMR design is to achieve a high neutronic performance according to
the requirements of neutron scattering instruments. The neutron characteristics of
beamlines such as integrated intensity, energy spectrum and pulse shape are needed
for instruments design.
1.2.1.1 Requirements from instruments
For design of neutron scattering instruments, it’s necessary to consider both

intensity and resolution in suitable neutron wavelength (energy) range. The resolution
is generally dependent on the pulse shape for instruments of pulse source. The
intensity must be as high as possible within the constraint of resolution requirement.
It’s also need to suppress the background of neutron and gamma ray.
According to the users’s requirements and suggestions, three kind of moderators
(coupled hydrogen moderator CHM, decoupled water moderator DWM and
decoupled & poisoned hydrogen moderator DPHM) were employed in CSNS target
station to supply varied neutronics performance for 18 neutron beamlines. In phase I,
three instruments (HFPD, SANS & Reflectormeter) will be built. The pulse
characteristics of DWM is suitable for HFPD and CHM for SANS and reflectormeter.
1.2.1.2 Calculation methods
Monte Carel transport code MCNPX was used in simulation of TMR neutronics
design and optimization with database and scattering kernel from ENDF / Sab2002/
La150. Variation reduction methods such as weight window and point detector were
8
employed in calculations to speed up the convergence of calculation. The

time-integrated spectrum is calculated by using point detector tally located some
distance from the viewed surface of moderators. The pulse shape results come from
the current tally on the viewed surface of the moderator material. The spatial
distribution results come from the pinhole tally aimed to the center of moderator.
1.2.1.3 Geometry model
The baseline geometry model used in the TMR simulation is shown in figure
1.2-1 and 1.2-2，the proton beam window included in the model is not shown in the
figures. The main parameters of the model used in the calculation are summarized in
table 1.2-1.
Fig. 1.2-1. y-z section view of geometry (y+ proton incident direction)
9
Fig.1.2-2 enlarged y-z section view of target-moderators area (left up), x-y
section view at target plane (right up), x-y section view at CHM plane below
target（left down）x-y section view at DWM&DPHM plane above target (right
down)
10
Table 1.2-1. Main parameters for baseline model

proton beam energy 1.6 GeV
beam footprint VXH 40x120 mm
Beam profile gaussian
Tungsten claded by 0.5mm
Target material
tantalum
length 570mm for W
cross section VXH 50x130 mm
coolant D2O/H2O, 1.5mm channel
8mm SS316 (2/4mm for incident
target container
window)
CHM hydrogen volume Φ150x100mm 20K
Hydrogen vessel thickness 9mm except 5mm for view surface
water premoderator thickness 20mm
view surface VxH 100x102.2 mm
DPHM hydrogen volume 120x120x50 mm 20K
hydrogen vessel thickness 7mm
view surface VxH 100x102.2 mm
poison position offset from
5mm
center
poisoner Cd/Gd 0.5mm
decoupler Cd/ B4C 0.5-2mm
DWM water volume 110x110x50 mm
water container thickness 4mm
decoupler Cd/ B4C 0.5-2mm
normal direction to proton
90 degree
beam
Reflector Be reflector Φ700x800mm
Fe reflector 1000x1000x1000mm
coolant D2O/H2O, 10% volume fraction
11
1.2.1.4 Neutron spectra
The neutron leakage spectra from moderators in different measurement (the

energy spectra, the lethargy spectra and the wavelength spectra) are illustrated in
Fig.1.2-3. All results are from the detector tallies located in the normal direction of
moderator viewed surface. Beamline02(CHM) and beamline17(DPHM broad side)
locates at the back direction of proton incident and beamline05(DWM) is vertical to
the proton incident direction. The result represents the neutron spectral characteristics
of CSNS.
Fig. 1.2-3. the energy spectra (left up) the lethargy spectra (right up) the
enlarged view at low energy of lethargy spectra and the wavelength spectra from
CHM(beamline02), DWM (beamline05) and DPHM (beamline08 narrow side,
beamline17 broad side)
1.2.1.5 Neutron pulse shape
The calculated full width of half maximum(FWHM) of neutron pulse from

different moderator are summarized in figure 1.2-4. The detail results of pulse shape
with energy (1meV, 5meV, 10meV, 25meV, 50meV, 100meV, 400meV and 1eV) are
summarized in figure 1.2-5. The decay of pulses are dominated by the slow down
term and thermalization term of moderators and also by reflector decay at enrgy above
decouple energy.
12
Fig. 1.2-4. FWHM of neutron pulse at beamline02 05 08 17
13
Fig. 1.2-5. neutron pulse shape from moderators at different energy.
14
1.2.1.6 Spatial distribution of neutron brightness
Figure 1.2-6 shows the spatial distribution of cold and thermal neutron brightness
from two side of DPHM. The 10cmx10cm viewed surface is shrinked to -2 to 2 of the
s, t axis in the figure due to scale of the pinhole imaging. two shadow lines is due to
the exist of hydrogen inlet tube.
Figure 1.2-7 shows the spatial distribution of neutron brightness within different
energy interval from CHM. T The brightness at near target side is more intense than
far target side for cold and thermal neutron, the minimum exist in the central of
moderator, this is the effect of water premoderator.
Figure 1.2-8 shows the spatial distribution of neutron brightness within different
energy interval from DWM. Different from CHM, the maximum area of thermal
neutron is near the central of moderator.
Fig. 1.2-6. Spatial distribution of cold and thermal neutron brightness from
two side of DPHM. Broad side 0-10meV (left up) Broad side 10-25meV (right up)
narrow side 0-10 meV (left down) narrow side 10-25meV (right down) (target
position: left)
15
Fig. 1.2-7. Spatial distribution of neutron brightness from CHM (target

position: left)
16
Fig. 1.2-8. Spatial distribution of neutron brightness from DWM (target

position: right)
17
1.2.1.7 γ ray characteristics
Gamma rays emitted from moderators are one of the source term of instrument’s
background. The spectra and emitted time distribution of gamma ray from CHM is
shown in Figure 1.2-9 as example. Two strong lines (2.223 and 7.724MeV) in energy
spectrum are origined from radioactive capture of hydrogen and aluminium. The
decay of 0.5-5 MeV gamma ray (mainly from hydrogen radioactive capture) exhibited
similar trend as the decay of neutron flux inside moderator.
Fig. 1.2-9. Gamma ray energy spectrum from Coupled hydrogen moderator
(left) and emitted time distribution for different energy range (right).
1.2.2 Shielding analysis
1.2.2.1 The neutron source term
To provide a basis for the shield design, we give the distribution of high-energy
neutron (E>20MeV) leak from the bare tungsten target when the target is bombarded
by 1.6GeV proton. Figure 1.2-10 shows the neutrons are relatively hard especially in
the forward direction which will approach the energy of the incident proton.
0.01
0~47o
1E-3 47o~66o
66o~86o
86o~94o
Intensity (n/p/sr)
1E-4 94o~114o
114o~133o
133o~180o
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
Energy (MeV)
Fig. 1.2-10. leakage neutron spectra (0o means the proton incident direction)
18
1.2.2.2 The Monte-Carlo simulation and discrete ordinates methods
The Monte Carlo particle transport code MCNPX with a variety of variance
reduction techniques is very suited for shielding design especially for analysing
geometrical complex system. For the simplified 2-D CSNS target station shielding
design, we also use the deterministic discrete ordinates transport code DOORS. A
simple test calculation was performed to compare these two codes: MCNPX and
DOORS. The DOORS calculations use the newly developed cross-section library
HEST1.0, a corrected cross section is implemented in HEST1.0 for iron of natural
isotopic composition. Figure 1.2-11 shows the comparison between MCNPX and
ANISN/ DOORS with the uncorrected and corrected cross sections. The model of this
calculation consists of a steel sphere of 1 meter in radius with an isotropic 1 or
0.1MeV neutron source in the center. We find ANISN with the corrected iron cross
section give the results that agree with the results by MCNPX very well.
(a) (b)
Fig. 1.2-11. the neutron fluxes at the outer surface of the 1-meter steel sphere
calculated by MCNPX, ANISN/uncorrected cross section and ANISN/corrected
cross section
1.2.2.3 The primary shielding design with DORT for CSNS TS
Figure 1.2-12(a) shows the 2-D DORT calculation model. The target station
monolith is cylindrical in shape with the target located at the center of the monolith
and 200 cm above the bottom. The shutters are positioned on each neutron beam line
approximately 250 cm from the center. For simplifying, the TMR only consists
of a tungsten target, a beryllium surrounded by stainless steel reflector.
MCNPX calculates the neutron fluxes escaping from the reflector surface as the
source term for DORT. Figure 1.2-12(b) gives the DORT results and it shows five
meter thick steel adding 1 meter thick heavy concrete is enough for shielding 200 kW
target station. This result basically agrees with that based on the Monte Carlo method.
19
Fig. 1.2-12. (a) monolith model (b) the dose rate with the distance from the center
1.2.2.4 The sandwich structure of the CSNS TS
A relative high density in conjunction with low cost and economical attraction
makes steel an attractive shielding material. However, iron has some regions (for
example, 25keV, 89keV)where the total cross section is very low. In the target
shielding design, we had considered a sandwich structure to compensate this
deficiency. Figure 1.2-13(a) shows part of the MCNPX geometrical model. We add
two concrete layers in the steel bulk shielding. One is located above the target centre
250cm with its thickness 30cm as shown in figure; the other is located above the
centre 475cm with its thickness 25cm. Our results show that this sandwich structure is
much more efficient to shield neutrons than the integrated steel. The neutron spectra
escaping from surface 113,114,117 is shown in figure 1.2-13(b). The concrete layer
absorbs the leaking neutrons at low cross section region very well.
Fig. 1.2-13. the MCNPX model for CSNS TS shielding the neutron current
escaping from surface 113,114,117
20
1.2.3 Activation, afterheat calculation and related shielding
analysis
The activation analysis flow can be divided into three parts: (1) the spallation
reactions and particle transports calculated with the Monte Carlo codes of LAHET
/MCNP4C or MCNPX; (2) the activity, afterheat and decay gamma rays of the
radionuclide, calculated with the buildup and decay code CINDER’90; and (3) the
dose rate induced from the decay gamma ray and related shielding design calculated
with the MCNP4C code. Figure 1.2-14 shows the total activity of W-Ta target and the
dominant radionuclide at a given decay time.The total activity reaches 4.7×1015 Bq
after 5 years irradiation. During the initial cooling time, the dominant radionuclide is
W-181 before one day decay time and Ta-179 before one year decay time. For longer
cooling time, the total activity mainly comes from the long-life radionuclide. For
example, H-3 dominates the total activity for 10 years decay and Ho-163 for longer
decay time. Table 1.2-2 lists the activity of the TMR components in the CSNS target
station after 5 years irradiation, including the W-Ta target, target vessel, CHM vessels,
DPHM vessels, DWM vessels and Be/Fe reflectors. The cooling time corresponds to
1 day, 3 days, 7 days, 30 days and 1 year.
Fig. 1.2-14. Time evolutions of total activity in W-Ta target after 100kW, 5
years irradiation, comparing with the dominant radionuclide and the long-lived
radionuclide.
21
Fig. 1.2-15. Afterheat distributions in the W (a) and Ta (b) target after 5
years irradiation, for beam off, 3 days and 7 days cooling
Figure 1.2-15 shows the afterheat of W and Ta target for 5 years irradiation. The
total afterheat in the W-Ta target is about 1.3 KW, which should be included in the
thermal-hydraulic analysis of the target. Figure 1.2-16 presents the dose rate in the
service cell shielding design calculations.
Table 1.2-2. Activity (Bq) in the components of CSNS target station after 5
years irradiation
Components 1 day 3 days 7 days 30 days 1 year

W-Ta target 2.2e15 1.8e15 1.5e15 1.1e15 3.8e14
Target vessel 9.0e13 8.6e13 8.1e13 6.7e13 3.2e13
CHM vessels 7.3e12 2.1e12 7.5e11 7.3e11 5.6e11
DPHM vessels 1.8e12 1.5e12 1.4e12 1.2e12 6.9e11
DWM vessel 1.9e12 1.6e12 1.4e12 1.1e12 6.4e11
Be reflector 6.3e13 6.2e13 6.2e13 5.8e13 4.5e13
Fe reflector 8.8e14 8.4e14 7.9e14 6.6e14 3.1e14
22
Fig. 1.2-16. The dose rate of the service cell shielding for the gamma-ray of
activated W-Ta target.
1.2.4 Radiation damage

Materials of target station are considered to be irradiated by extremely intense
flux of energetic particles. The expected lifetime of the components is required to
determine the potential site contamination and the scheme of remote handling and
maintenance.The tungsten target and its stainless steel vessel are the most heavily
exposed components and therefore their radiation damages are very sever. As an
example, radiation damage calculation for target is presented.
In order to quantify the target damage due to proton and neutron irradiation we
consider the following quantities which include (i) radiation damage in terms of
displacements per atom (dpa); (ii) the total helium and hydrogen production.
1.2.4.1 DPA and gas production cross section
For E n / p > 150 MeV ,the DPA and gas production cross section are obtained by
calculating the damage energy, the helium and the hydrogen productivity in a thin
target when it is bombarded by proton/neutron. The cross section from ENDF/B-VI
(E<20MeV) and LA150 (20MeV<E<150MeV) is also used. Figure 1.2-17gives the
damage energy and gas production cross section σ damage , σ Helium and σ H of SS316
and tungsten. the dpa is defined as

β
σ displacement = σ damage , (1.2-1)
2 Ed
where β = 0.8 , Ed is the threshold displacement energy, for W and SS316 this
values are 90, 40eV, respectively.
23
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(e) (f)
Fig. 1.2-17. Neutron and proton induced damage energy and gas production
cross sections from ENDF/B-VI (En<20MeV), LA150 (20MeV<En<150MeV),
and Bertini/Julich/MPM calculation for SS316 and CEM2K calculation for
tungsten (En>150MeV, Ep>1MeV). (a)~(c) SS316; (d)~(f) tungsten.
1.2.4.2 The damage evaluation of CSNS target
Two profiles of the proton beam is used in calculations. One is uniform with 120
mm and 40 mm in wide and height, respectively. One is Gaussian with FWHM 66
mm and 22 mm in wide and height, respectively. 5×5 mm2 at the center of the target
vessel window and target plate are tallied to estimate the maximum damage of the
vessel and the target.
24
10
10
neutron-Gaussian
Particle intensity (1/cm2/proton/MeV)
Particle intensity (1/cm2/proton/MeV)

proton-Gaussian
0.1 neutron-uniform
0.1 proton-uniform
neutron-Gaussian window vessel
proton-Gaussian
1E-3 neutron-uniform
proton-uniform 1E-3
target
1E-5
1E-5
1E-7 1E-7
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Energy(MeV) Energy (MeV)
Fig. 1.2-18. the neutron and proton flux at the center of (left) the
window vessel; (right) the target.
Figure 1.2-18 shows the maximum neutron and proton fluxes of the vessel
window and the fourth target bombarded by the uniform and Gaussian proton beams.
We calculate the DPA and gas production via folding the neutron and proton fluxes
with the damage cross sections. For the proton beam power 100kW and 5000h (one
operating year), the maximum DPA, helium production and hydrogen production in
vessel and the fourth target plate are 2.5 and 5.5 dpa/y, 305 and 353 appm/y, 1115 and
2141 appm/y for the Gaussian proton beam and 1.3 and 2.2 dpa/y 105 and 123 appm/y,
337 and 768 appm/y for the uniform proton beam.
Above results shows for 100kW-level CSNS target, the gas production is not
sever and the lifetime is mainly determined by the displacement rate. The
displacement rates of the target under Gaussian proton beam means the lifetime of the
components are about 2 years.
1.2.5 Heat deposition calculation

The heat deposition results throughout whole system are essential information
for the engineering design of the various components need cooling. It’s summaried in
Table 1.2-3 The calculations is performed by MCNPX with considering the transport
of neutron, gamma ray, proton, pion, muon, deuterium, 3He and 4He. More details
about the heat deposition distribution of components are shown in relevant reports.
25
Table 1.2-3. heat deposition in components of target station (/1.6GeV proton)

Components Deposition energy(MeV)
Target & coolant 754.3
Target container 47.8
Proton beam window 8.7
Coupled hydrogen moderator 7.2
Premoderator 17.5
Decoupled water moderator 5.4
Decoupled & poisoned 6.8
Beryllium reflector 206.8
Iron reflector 226.6
Helium vessel 32.7
Shielding 145.6
Total 1459.4
1.2.6. Neutronic performance measurement

The performance measurements are crucial for commission and operation to
demonstrate that target station are working properly to produce neutron at a
satisfactory level, it’s also be helpful to validate the MC simulation. Four
measurement methods for energy spectrum, pulse shape, absolute intensity and spatial
distribution are planned.
1.2.6.1 TOF energy spectrum measurement
TOF method is typically used in pulse neutron source to measure neutron energy
spetrum. There are many detectors available for TOF measurement, the Li-glass
scintillator detector working in current mode is chosen to measure the neutron
spectrum during commission (Fig 1.2-19), this can be helpful to reduce the activity of
target station components during commission due to the high detective efficiency of
Li-glass. The low-efficiency 3He proportional counter is used during operation, and
there are many commercial counters to satisfy our demand. the ORDELA Model
4511N and the CANBERRA Model MNH10/4.2F neutron beam monitor are the
candidates. The detection efficiency of above detectors are customer specified,
typically 10-4 for thermal neutron.
26
Fig. 1.2-19. The Li-glass scintillator in current model
The 3He detector TOF measurement system includes detector, electronics,

data-acquisition system ( Fig 1.2-20). T0 signal from the accelerator is used as a start
signal of time analyzer.
Fig. 1.2-20. The experimental setup of 3He detector TOF measurement
1.2.6.2 Pulse shape measurement
The pulse shape of neuton emitted from moderator as functions of energy is

essential for design of instruments. A time-focused crystal monochromator and
detector arrangement is chosen to measure the pulse shape of serials neutrons which
energy fulfill the Bragg law.
The time-focusing (sometimes partial time-focusing) geometry is used in our
measurements due to the high time-resolution. It is possible to arrange the geometry
as show in figure 1.2-21 so that the contribution to the time width is small
independently of the size of some particular component. The conditions for time
focusing are given as follow:
tan Θm = 1/2(1 + L1/L2 ) cot ΘB ,
tan Θc= [cos Θd tan Θm + sin(2ΘB + Θd)]/2 sin ΘB sin(ΘB + Θd) ,
tan Θd = 1/2(1 + L2/L1 ) cot ΘB.
27
Θc
L1
Θm
ΘB
Ref lec t ing
Moderat or Planes Cr y st al
2ΘB
L2
Θd
Det ect or
Fig. 1.2-21. The schematic view of experimental arrangement in time

focusing geometry
3
He proportional counter (0.5 inch) or Li-glass scintillator is used to detect the
Bragg reflection neutrons. The Ge,Si single crystal and Mica are the candidates for
monochromator, the expected wavelength range by this method is about 0.3~10Anstr.
The electronics and the data acquisition system for this measurement is similar to the
energy spectrum measurement system.
1.2.6.3 Absolute intensity measurement
The absolute thermal neutron intensities would be measured by the gold foil
activation method. This method is also employed to calibration the TOF spectrum
measurement system. A bare gold foil and a cadmium-covered gold foil are irradiated
at the same position, the activation of gold foil after irradiation would be measured by
HPGe gamma spectroscopy respectively. The neutron absorption cross sections for
197Au with and without cadmium-covered are shown as follow.
Fig. 1.2-22. The neutron absorption cross sections for 197Au with and
without cadmium covered
Many kinds of material foils are selected to act as the threshold detectors for
higher energy neutron spectrum measurement. For example , 176Lu(n,r)177Lu, 235U(n,f)
at thermal region and intermediate energy region, 58Ni(n,p)58Co, 54Fe(n,p)54Mn at the
fast neutron region. The neutron spectrum is unfolded with the iterative method
28
SAND-Ⅱ.
1.2.6.4 Spatial distribution measurement
Time-integrated 2-D cold and thermal neutron images will be obtained by

imaging plate measurement system. There is commercial neutron imaging plate such
as Fujifilm NIP before but unavailable now. The cold and thermal neutron flux
spatial distribution would be recored by commercial X ray imaging plate coupled with
a gadolinium converting layer. The imaging plate would be readout by laser scanning
imaging system.
29
1.3 TARGET SYSTEM

Quan Ji (jiq@ihep.ac.cn)
1.3.1 The physical design of target

The target for spallation neutron source is demanded to have high neutron
production, low neutron absorbing cross section, high atomic density, low radiation
damage and low decay heat. According to the proton beam power of CSNS, the solid
target is preferred because it has better neutronic performance than liquid target.
Uranium, tungsten, tantalum, lead are the candidates of target material. Lead has
lower neutron yield because of its low atomic density. The neutron generated by
uranium is about twice of tungsten or tantalum due to fission, but uranium has
severe radiation damage problem than tungsten or tantalum according to the
experiences of ISIS and IPNS, and the delay emitted neutrons from fission would
increase the background. Tantalum has higher decay heat and activity after
irradiation, and worse heat conduction performance . According to the above
comparison, tungsten is selected as the CSNS target material,. Under the strong
radiation environment, erosion of tungsten by high-pressure cooling water erosion is
very severe. Tantalum has good corrosion resistance properties, and the neutronic
performance is similar with tungsten, the tungsten claded with tantalum is selected in
CSNS.
Monte Carlo simulation shows that the rectangular target has higher leakage
neutron intensity than cylindrical target and square target. The rectangular target is
adopted in CSNS target design to reduce the distance between the moderator and the
region of neutron generatingand to improve the target - moderator coupling efficiency.
The target section size is designed as 130 mm × 50 mm. The range of 1.6 GeV
protons in the tungsten is about 570 mm, and the length of target is selected as 570mm
to stop incident proton in the target.
The heat deposition in the target is taken away by the coolant. The neutron
absorption cross section of heavy water is much smaller than the light water, so heavy
water is chosen as the coolant, which can increased 5% -7% of the neutron output.
1.3.2 Heat deposition calculation and thermal design
1.3.2.1 Heat deposition calculation
(1) Calculation model

1)Material: t tungsten claded with thin layer of tantalum and stainless steel for
target vessel.
2)Target section: 50 mm×130 mm.
3)Target length: 607.5 mm (tungsten: 570 mm; tantalum: 15 mm; heavy water:
22.5 mm).
30
4)Proton energy: 1.6 GeV; power: 200 kW.

5)Proton beam footprint: 40 mm×120 mm, Gauss distribution in two direction,
FWHM: 20 mm×60 mm.
(2) The results
Figure 1.3-1 shows the three-dimensional heat deposition density distribution in
target. The distribution is similar with density distribution of the proton beam power,
which is the Gauss distribution.
Fig. 1.3-1. Heat deposition distribution of the target
1.3.2.2 Thermal design
Target structural needs careful design, because it is related to safety of target

system and D2O circuit. Therefore, CFD analysis is adopted here to perform target
thermal design.
(1) Numerical model and computational condition
1) Numerical model
After a detail design analysis, the coolant gap width was defined to be 1.5mm,
and the target is separated into 15 plates. According to the simulation results of heat
deposited in target, the target module is divided into two cooling areas:
high-deposition region and low-deposition region. The former needs a higher water
velocity about 3.5m/s in its gaps to remove the heat generated in target, while the
velocity in the gaps of the latter one is just about 2m/s. The water flux of each region
is controlled by a baffle. Fig 1.3-2 shows the numerical model of target.
31
Fig. 1.3-2. Numerical model of target
2) Computational condition
The initial and boundary conditions for simulation are as follows:
a) Inlet velocity : 300K, 3.2L/s
b) Outlet pressure: 0bar, with reference pressure 4bar
c) Neglecting the heat transfer between target vessel and ambient, heat deposited
in target is completely carried away by D2O
d) To simplifying model, tantalum cladding perpendicular to the incident
direction of proton beam is modeling, while the others adopts shell conduction model
to compute the thermal resistance of tantalum.
e) Realizable k-ε Model, Standard Wall Functions, SIMPLEC
f) Considering the change of physical property of water and tungsten depend on
temperature.
h) 20% allowance of heat deposited is took into account.
(2) Results and analysis
Figs.1.3-3 and 1.3-4 shows the temperature distribution of target and its vessel.
The peak temperature is similar and around 170℃ for the target plates in
the front of target module. The water temperature is less than 40℃.
Fig. 1.3-3. Temperature distribution of target and its vessel
32
Fig. 1.3-4 Temperature of target center along the proton beam(z=0, x=0)
Fig.1.3-5 shows the velocity path line and velocity distribution in the model.The
maximal velocity takes place in the gap ingress. The size and direction of flow
passage change suddenly, which leads to significant entrance effect and velocity
variation. Fig.1.3-5(b) shows the distribution of velocity over 3.8m/s, and the peak
velocity appears in the last gap ingress. Fig.1.3-5(c) shows the velocity path line.
(a) Velocity vector (z=0) (b) v≥3.8m/s
33
(c) Velocity path line
Fig. 1.3-5. Velocity distribution
Table 1.3-1. Simulation results in 200kW proton beam power

outlet pressur velocity
flow rate peak temperature（℃）
temperature e drop max.
(L/s) target wall water (℃) (kPa) (m/s)
3.201 176 137 46.5 36.65 17.307 4.29
The results of several important parameters is summarized in Table 1.3-1.The

peak temperature of target is just 176℃, and of the peak temperature of tantalum wall
is 137℃ and less than the boiling temperature of water in 4bar. Water operating in
4bar can increase the boiling point (Fig.1.3-6), in other words, increase the safety of
target system and cooling system.
440
160
430
150
420
140
t/℃
410
T/K
130
400
120
390
110
380
100
370
1 2 3 4 5 6
p/bar
Fig.1.3-6. Water boiling point varying with pressure
34
(3) Abnormal situation

Abnormal situation may take place during operation, such as deviation of proton
beam, , power failure, and so on.
Footprint of proton beam from accelerator is 40*120mm, and the deviation rang
is about 1~2mm. The target cross section is 50*130mm, which reserving 5mm
allowance. Therefore, deviation of proton beam has little effect on target system
safety and neutron yield.
When power failure appears, UPS will be used to ensure normal operation of
cooling system.
1.3.3 Resist radiation damage and anticorrosion measures of
tungsten target
The CSNS targets are composed of many parallel tungsten plates and high
pressure heavy water flows in gaps between the plates. The radiation damage are
different depend on the locations of the target pieces (Include hydrogen, helium
ions-remnants of defect caused by the target crystal structure, dislocation and
low-temperature metal embrittlement). In addition, under the condition of strong
radiation, high pressure water will severely corrosive bare tungsten target. We can
effectively reduce the radiation damage of the target and improve the target life-span
by some methods.
Tungsten has poor corrosion resistance against water coolants due to the
formation of a ragged tungsten hydroxide, and intense susceptibility to radiation
embrittlement. One proach to avoid the former problem is to clad tungsten with a
corrosion-resistant material, such as titanium, stainless steel, Zircaloy, gold or
tantalum. Especially stainless steel and zirconium alloys are widely used for nuclear
reactor fuel rods bag shell material. However, the users of neutron scattering facilities
hope that the neutron yield will be as high as possible. Tantalum is the good choose
because its density is the highest among the candidate materials, except for gold. In
addition, it was found that tanttalum target bombarded by a 800 MeV proton beam
and secondary neutrons up to a dose of 13 dpa at the ISIS facility of Rutherford
Appleton did not lose their ductility. This result and the experience of using tungsten
target and the 800 MeV proton irradiation experiments for the APT and ADTP
projects at LANSCE give us hope for a long-life solid target with good performance
by manufacturing a tungsten block and tantalum clad.
In CSNS prefabrication research, we have some fruits in tungsten clad with
tantalum using HIP’ing and Plasma spray methods.
(1) HIP: ISIS developed a tantalum-clad tungsten target block by means of the
HIP’ing at 1400°C and a high pressure of 1450Mpa. However, such conditions are not
easily attained with an ordinary HIP. Japanese researchers found an optimum HIP
conditions with respect to a temperature of 1500°C, pressure of 200Mpa and
succeeded to produce HIP’ing blocks. From the international cooperation, we got the
KEK’s and JAERI’s HIP technique information and developed our own HIP process
35
with BAOTI group, China iron and steel research institute group, Beijing institute of
electro maching and Beijing aeronautical manufacturing technology research institute.
Finally, we explored our optimum HIP conditions and successfully trial-produced the
tungsten tantalum target modules. Figs1.3-7 to Figs1.3-9 are the pictures of the HIP
process.
a b
c d
Fig. 1.3-7. The process of tungsten coated with tantalum.
Fig. 1.3-8. Tantalum-clad tungsten target block after HIP
36
Fig. 1.3-9. SEM photo showing good interfaces of target sample
(2) Plasma spraying: A plasma torch consists of a tungsten cathode, a

water-cooled copper anode with a central nozzle, and a gas feeding system; an arc is
struck between the cathode and the anode, across the gas flux, so that ionization of
atoms and molecules transform the gas into a hot and high-velocity plasma. The
coating material, in powder form, is radially fed into the plasma flux just outside the
nozzle exit: the particles are therefore dragged and heated by the plasma itself, so that
they melt and accelerate towards the substrate. The melted droplets impact on the
substrate, flattening and solidifying in a few microseconds, assuming a typical
lamellar (or splat-like) morphology. Plasma spraying can obtain difference coat which
is flat, low porosity, high intensity. Supersonic Plasma spraying has stronger and
faster plasma jet. We have got some satisfactory results in Plasma spraying tantalum
on tungsten, Fig.1.3-10 was the TEM photo of the Plasma spraying tantalum on
tungsten. Now the next step for further optimization process is underway.
Fig.1.3-10. SEM photo of Plasma spraying tantalum
37
1.3.4 Target mechanical design

Target is a core component of target station. Apart from physical requirement and
cooling performance, target design should consider its integral rigidity, long-term
operation reliability of different metal weld joints in alternating thermal stress,
function realization for temperature detection, etc.
The target system is consist of target made of tungsten, target shell and flange
made of 316 stainless steel (Fig.1.3-11). The whole length of tungsten target and shell
(container) is 750mm, with a thickness of 66mm. The tungsten target is the main
part for neutrons production, with whole length of 611.5mm of combined 15 target
plates, a height of 51mm and a width of 131mm. Flange connection is used here to
joint target system and target maintenance devices. The length, height and thickness
of flange is respectively 292mm, 120mm and 22mm.
Fig. 1.3-11. Target system
The main function of target shell is supporting tungsten target and forming water
channel to cooing target and itself. It is welded by bottom container and cover board.
This structure has reliable sealing for a little weld. The upper and lower board has a
thickness of 10mm. In the surfaces contacting tungsten target, troughs, with a depth of
2.5mm, are processed to fix tungsten target(Fig. 1.3-12).
Fig. 1.3-12. Target shell
38
Baffle is introduced here to divide tungsten target into two cooling zone, high-
deposition region and low-deposition region. The method ensures that the gaps
velocity in the former is higher than that in the latter. In that case, a well-distributed
temperature of the whole target and good cooling effect could be obtained. This
structure simplifies installation and maintenance.
At the inlet and outlet of cooling water, a sealing structure made up of flange and
gasket ensures reliable seal. The structure is presented in Fig. 1.3-13.
Fig. 1.3-13. Sealing structure
Tantalum is claded on the surface of tungsten plates, with cladding thickness of

0.5mm, to enhance tungsten’s corrosion resistance and prolong target life. Target
module is presented in Fig. 1.3-14. The width of gaps between target plates is 1.5mm,
used as cooling channels.
Fig. 1.3-14. Target module
The gap is processed as follows: five surfaces of tungsten plate are clad with
0.5mm tantalum, while the remainder is clad with 2mm tantalum. The gap then be
machined, with several thin ribs to enhance heat transfer areas(Fig.1.3-15). Tungsten
is a kind of material that is difficult to be processed. This processing method solves
not only the foregoing problem but also the problem of cladding with tantalum on the
surfaces of tungsten that has step structure.
39
Fig. 1.3-15. Target plate clad with tantalum
The flange at the back-end of target has 14 via holes with 12.5mm in diameter.
The holes are corresponding to 14 threaded holes lying at the fixation apparatus of
maintenance device. Diameter of the threaded holes is 12mm. The target is fixed as
cantilever by 14 screws with 12mm in diameter. The concrete structure is presented in
Fig.1.3-16.
Fig. 1.3-16. Connecting holes in flange
Deflection of the whole target is determined mainly by gravity. Because of

symmetric structure, one quarter is selected for modeling and simulation. The
simulation results show that the maximum displacement is 0.2mm, taking place at the
proton beam entrance(Fig.1.3-17), and the maximum stress is 170MPa, taking place at
the joint of last target plate and target shell(Fig.1.3-18).
Fig. 1.3-17. The maximum displacement of target shell
40
Fig. 1.3-18. The maximum stress of target shell
1.3.5 Target cooing system

D2O is used here to remove heat deposited in target. Target cooing system runs
parallel to reflector cooing system. Both them adopt D2O as cooling medium. To
reducing diffusion of the radioactivity, the D2O system works in closed cycle. Besides,
delay tank is introduced to decreasethe dose around related equipment. Detail design
about D2O system is obtained in the section of 3.3.2.2. Target temperature could be
monitored by inlet and outlet water temperature. UPS is backuped for cooling system
during power failure.
1.3.6 Interface joining with other systems

Joining with target system there are vessel system, D2O cooling system and
control system. Flange connection is adopted here to implement machinery
installations. Control system ensures the flow, pressures, temperatures etc. that target
system needs. Measurement of flow, pressures, temperatures etc. are crucial to the
safe operation of the plant. Detail needs further design.
41
1.4 MODERATOR AND REFLECTOR

Chunming Hu (chunming@163.com)
1.4.1 Introduction
Most of the neutrons produce from spallation reaction are the isotropic
evaporation neutrons peaked around MeV. The function of moderator is to slow down
and then thermalize these neutrons from MeV to meV region optimized for neutron
scattering instruments. The reflector, which surround the moderators, return into the
moderators neutrons that miss the moderator or leak out before slowing down, for
another chance to slow down in the moderator and contribute to the moderator output
of slow neutron.
Two cryogenic hydrogen moderators and an ambient water moderator are
employed in CSNS target station to supply cold, thermal or epithermal neutrons for 18
neutron beamlines. This arrangement is expected to satisfy the flux requirements of
different wavelength for neutron scattering instruments. Liquid and solid methane are
attractive because of their neutronics performance. However, hydrogen does not
present the polymerization problem of methane at high beam power and is chosen as
cold moderator material.
The resolution of neutron scattering instruments is generally dependent on the
neutron pulse shape. The coupled hydrogen moderator is adopted to provide high
time-averaged cold neutron intensity with acceptable pulse width. On the other hand,
the decoupled and poisoned hydrogen moderator is chosen to provide narrow pulse
for high resolution instruments. The decoupled water moderator is suitable for middle
resolution instruments worked in thermal and epithermal region.
Wing configuration is adopted for our target-moderator coupling to reduce the
fast neutron background. The coupled hydrogen moderator locates below the target
alone to avoid the intensity decrease caused by the interference of neutron absorption
material such as decoupler. The water pre-moderator is adopted for couple hydrogen
moderator to enhance the cold neutron intensity and decrease heat deposition in
hydrogen. The position of couple hydrogen moderator relative to target is optimized
to maximum the cold neutron output. The decoupled water moderator and the
decoupled & poisoned hydrogen moderator locate above the target. To balance the
neutron intensity of two moderators, they locate on either side of the maximum
position of neutron leakage from target. Each moderator supply 6 neutron beamline by
extraction from two sides, and the occupied angle for every beamline is 12 degree.
Beside the reflection and shielding function, reflector also act as a source of
primary neutrons from spallation reaction, as well as (n,2n) reaction. The inner
beryllium reflector with outer iron reflector/shield is adopted in our design. It’s cooled
by heavy water. In Fig. 1.4-1, the configuration of the moderators and reflector in
CSNS is presented.
More details about the parameters and simulation results of TMR neutronics
performance present in the section of TS physics. This section just provides a
42
summary review on the preliminary design of these moderators and a description of

the strength calculation and the thermal-hydraulic studies that are carrying out to
support the components development in the next engineering stage.
Fig. 1.4-1. Moderator & reflector configuration in CSNS
1.4.2 Moderators
1.4.2.1 Configuration
The CSNS target station contains a decoupled and poisoned hydrogen moderator
(DPHM) and an ambient decoupled water moderator (DWM) above Tungsten target, a
coupled hydrogen moderator (CHM) below the target. Each one of the three
moderator units is mounted into a vertical plug-in assembly, which will be replaced as
a complete unit during maintenance, as shown in Fig. 1.4-1. The main bodies of all
moderator vessels are composed of aluminum alloy Al6061-T6, which is used as
moderator material in many cold neutron sources world.
The schematic diagram of the circulation loop for the cryogenic hydrogen
moderators is listed in Fig. 1.4-2.
43
Fig. 1.4-2. Schematic diagram of cryogenic H2 circulation loop
The two cryogenic hydrogen moderators are more complicated than the ambient
water moderator. DPHM is of canteen shape with liquid hydrogen contained in an
inner aluminum hydrogen vessel, and this hydrogen vessel is surrounded by a vacuum
vessel, which is then surrounded by a helium vessel and, finally, by a cooling water
vessel. The cooling water does not cover the neutron extracted surface. The H2
moderator can be viewed from two opposing directions. Fig. 1.4-3 presents DPHM
structure (i.e., the hydrogen vessel, together with the surrounding vacuum, helium and
cooling water vessels). In the hydrogen vessel there is a 0.5-mm-thick cadmium
sheet used to “poison” the moderator. This sheet is vertical and parallel to the long
axis of the container with 5mm offset. As a decoupler, the outside wall of the cooling
water container will be coated with a 0.5mm-thick cadmium layer. This decoupler
covers all surface except for the neutron viewed surface..
CHM is of similar construction, but with cylindrical shape, and without the
decoupler and the poisoner. As shown in Fig. 1.4-4, from inside to outside, CHM
involves of a hydrogen vessel, a vacuum vessel, a helium vessel and a water
pre-moderator vessel. The water pre-moderator covers all surfaces except for the
neutron viewed surface. The H2 moderator can also be viewed from two opposing
directions,
DWM is just a vessel with rectangular shape containing the ambient water as
moderator, as shown in Fig. 1.4-5. The inner dimension of DWM is 110mm in height,
110mm in width and 50mm in thickness. The H2O moderator can be viewed from two
opposing directions, and the vessel is also covered with a cadmium decoupler on all
surfaces, except those through which neutrons are viewed.
44
Fig. 1.4-3. 3-D diagram of DPHM Fig.1.4- 4. 3-D diagram of CHM
Fig.1.4- 5. 3-D diagram of CWM
Table 1.4-1 below presents the configuration of moderators in CSNS.
Table 1.4-1. Configuration of moderators in CSNS

DPHM CHM DWM
Beam viewed area 100*102.2 mm
Beamline occupied angle 12°
Moderator material H2@20K,15bar H2@20K,15bar H2O@298K,4bar
Pre-moderator non H2O non
Shape Canteen Cylinder Canteen
Inner size of moderator cell 12W*12H*50 T cm φ15*10H cm 11W*11H*50T cm
Vacuum layer thickness 5mm 5mm -
Helium layer thickness 2mm 2mm -
Pre-moderator/cooling
5mm 20mm -
water layer thickness
Decoupler Cd(0.5mmT) non Cd(0.5mmT)
Poisoner Cd(0.5mmT) non non
45
1.4.2.2 Material and geometric parameters
The main bodies of the all moderator vessels are composed of aluminum alloy,
namely Al6061-T6. The material is used widely in nuclear engineering project in the
world. The mechanical property of this material is listed in Table 1.4-2.
Table 1.4-2. Mechanical property of

Al6061-T6
Modulus of elasticity/GPa 68.9
Poisson’s ratio 0.33
Allowable stress/MPa 65MPa
Weld allowable stress/MPa 41MPa Fig 1.4-6. DPHM plug-in assembly
Fig 1.4-7. CHM plug-in assembly Fig. 1.4-8. DWM plug-in assembly
46
Table 1.4-3. Structural and geometric parameters of DPHM
Hydrogen Vacuum Helium

Vessel Water vessel
vessel vessel vessel
125W*125H 147W*147H 157W*157H 171W*457.5
Overall dimension/mm
*64T *88T *98T H
*112 T
Transfer pipes
(inner diameter/mm) φ38 φ52 φ59.5 -
(outer diameter/mm) φ42 φ56 φ63.5 -
view surface walls
(thickness/mm) 7 3 2 3
↑↑ ↑↑
(curvature radius/mm) S 280 C 291 C 296 C 304
Rest walls
(Thickness/mm) F↑↑ 6 F3 F3 F3
Chamfering between
pipes and walls
(at inner surface/mm) 5 5 10 -
(at outer surface/mm) 15 10 15 -
Chamfering
between walls
(at inner surface/mm) 18 18 20 18
(at outer surface/mm) 10 18 10 10
↑↑
Note： S is spherical shape, C is cylindrical shape, F is flat shape.
47
Table 1.4-4. Structural and geometric parameters of CHM
Hydrogen Vacuum Helium Water

Vessel
vessel vessel vessel vessel
Overall dimension/mm φ150*100 φ168*128 φ178*138 φ222*467.5
Transfer pipes
(inner diameter/mm) φ38 φ52 φ59.5 φ85.8
(outer diameter/mm) φ42 φ56 φ63.5 φ89.1
View surface walls
(inner diameter/mm) φ75 φ84 φ89 φ111
Top & bottom walls
Chamfering between
pipes and walls
Chamfering
between walls
The three moderator units are mounted into a vertical plug-in assembly, as shown
in Fig. 1.4-6, 1.4-7, 1.4-8, respectively. The structural and geometric parameters of the
two hydrogen moderator vessels are listed in Table 1.4-3, 1.4-4, and such information
on DWM is presented in Section 1.4.2.1 of this paper.
1.4.2.3 Preliminary Strength calculation
A finite element model is built by ANSYS 10, and ten-node tetrahedron solid
elements are used for modeling the moderator vessels. Calculated stresses should be
compared with stress limits for each vessel of moderators.
The calculation results on DPHM, CHM and DWM are listed in Table 1.4-5,
1.4-6, and 1.4-7 respectively.
48
Table 1.4-5. Strength calculation result on DPHM

Vessel Water vessel
Design Pressure 1.9MPa * 0.2MPa ** 0.15MPa * 0.2MPa *
Allowable stress 65MPa
Weld Allowable Stress 41MPa
Allowable deformation 1 mm
Maximal stress 65.3MPa 37.4MPa 58.3MPa 62.6MPa
Maximal deformation 0.17mm 0.23mm 0.33mm 0.48mm
**
Notes: * inner pressure, outer pressure.
Table 1.4-6. Strength calculation result on CHM

Vessel Water vessel
Design Pressure 1.9MPa * 0.2MPa ** 0.15MPa * 0.2MPa *
Maximal stress 64.2MPa 59.5MPa 58.3MPa 50.2MPa
Maximal deformation 0.28mm 0.61mm 0.88mm 0.94mm
Notes: * inner pressure, ** outer pressure.
Table 1.4-7. Strength calculation result on DWM

Design Pressure 0.5MPa *
Maximal stress 53.3MPa
Maximal deformation 0.17mm
Notes: * inner pressure.
As the key component in moderator, the stress and deformation distributions in

hydrogen vessel of DPHM and CHM are shown in Fig. 1.4-9 and 1.4-10, respectively.
From the calculation result, it is found that the maximum stress in hydrogen cell
of DPHM reaches the stress limit, so the improvement and optimization on the cell
will be done in the following engineering stage.
49
Fig. 1.4-9. Stress and deformation distributions in hydrogen vessel (DPHM)
Fig. 1.4-10. Stress and deformation distributions in hydrogen vessel (CHM)
1.4.2.4 Hydraulic and thermal analysis
(1) Energy deposition in moderators

Commercial software CFX is applied for liquid–solid conjugate heat transfer
simulation, the heat source of which is from MCNPX by secondary development with
FORTRAN language. Considering the future update plan in CSNS (100kW beam
power (CSNS-I) update to 200kW (CSNS-II)), the energy deposition in all moderator
components will be linearly increased. For conservative, the heat source in CFX
calculation is added by 20%, comparing to the energy deposition from MCNPX
calculation. The material properties of hydrogen near 20K are from GASPAK. Fig.
1.4-11 shows the sketch of heat deposition of DPHM, CHM and DWM of CSNS with
200kW beam power.
50
Fig. 1.4-11. Heat deposition sketch in DPHM, CHM and DWM
(2) DPHM
DPHM has the most complex geometry in all moderators, and the Cd plate in
hydrogen vessel divides the hydrogen flow into 2 passages. The Cd plate has a very
high heat deposition. The total heat source by CFX user routine is 690W matching the
beam power 200kW. The hydraulic and thermal analyses for DPHM focus on the
hydrogen vessel, the liquid hydrogen and the poisoner in the cell. The analysis for
CHM later is similar to DPHM. For CSNS-II, two calculation cases with different
mass flow rate of liquid hydrogen, namely 32g/s and 65g/s, are given in the following
section, and only one case for CSNS-I with mass flow rate 32g/s. The inlet
temperature of liquid hydrogen is 18K in all calculation cases.
The heat deposition and the temperature distribution in hydrogen cell (including
the vessel, the liquid hydrogen and the poisoner) of CSNS-II case are shown in Fig.
1.4-12 and 1.4-13, respectively.
(a) vessel (b) Cd plate (c) liquid hydrogen
Fig 1.4-12. Heat deposition of DPHM of CSNS-II
51
(a) Al vessel (b) liquid hydrogen
(c) Cd Poisoner (d) whole DPHM
Fig. 1.4-13. Temperature distribution in DPHM of CSNS-II with mass flow

rate 32g/s
The calculation results on CSNS-I and II are listed in Table 1.4-8 with different
mass flow rate of liquid hydrogen.
Table 1.4-8. Temperature of CSNS DPHM

CSNS-I CSNS-II
Mass flow rate 32g/s 32g/s 65g/s
Temp. Dist. of
DPHM
Mean Temp. of H2 19.2K 20.3K 19.1K

Max Temp. of H2 24.1K 29.2K 25.5K
For the offset of the poisoner in the hydrogen cell, the difference on mean
temperatures are observable especially at CSNS-II. When the beam power is 200kW,
the mean temperature of liquid hydrogen at the left and right side of Cd plate is
21.0K and 19.8K, respectively, while the hydrogen mass flow rate is 32g/s. If the
52
mass flow rate is 65g/s, the two mean temperatures are 19.6K and 18.8K. The
redistribution on mass and the structural improvement on the hydrogen vessel in the
next engineering stage will decrease the difference on the mean temperature.
(3) CHM
By MCNPX, the total energy deposition in hydrogen vessel, liquid hydrogen and
pipes is 613W when the beam power is 200kW, and the heat source used in CFX
calculation is 665W. Fig. 1.4-14 shows the velocity and energy deposition
distributions in hydrogen vessel. The height of inlet pipe to bottom is 10mm for
suitable temperature distribution. For CHM, the mass flow rates of liquid hydrogen,
32g/s, for CSNS-I and CSNS-II are sufficient for neutron performance.
Stationary Zone
Recirculation zone
(a) (b)
Fig. 1.4-14. Velocity distribution (a) and heat deposition (b) in CHM
When the beam power is 100kW (CSNS-I), the mean and maximum
temperatures in liquid hydrogen are 19.5K and 22.3K, respectively. If the beam power
updates to 200kW (CSNS-II), the two temperatures are 20.5K and 26.2K respectively.
Fig. 1.4-15 shows the temperature distribution in CHM.
(a) CSNS-I (b) CSNS-II
Fig. 1.4-15. Temperature distribution in CHM
(4) DWM
To meet the need of neutron performance, light water flows into DWM at 298K,
53
and out at 300K, and the mass flow rate is 266g/s. The heat depositions in the water
and in the vessel wall of DWM are presented in Fig. 1.4-16, and the temperature
distribution are given in Fig. 1.4-17.
(a) in water
(b) in vessel wall
Fig. 1.4-16. Heat deposition in DWM
(a) in water
54
(b) in vessel wall
Fig. 1.4-17. Temperature distribution in DWM
1.4.3 Reflector
1.4.3.1 Introduction
The function of a reflector is to enhance slow-neutron intensities by reflecting
leakage-neutrons from the target, which do not directly enter the moderator, towards
the moderator. CSNS selects two materials as the reflector: Beryllium and steel. The
inner Beryllium reflector is a cylinder with 700mm diameter 800mm height. The outer
steel reflector, which acts as a part of the shield simultaneously, is a cube 1m long,
with a hole inside to contain the Beryllium reflector.
In view of assembling and maintenance, the reflector in CSNS is designed in
two-container form, as shown in Fig. 1.4-18. The containers are made of Aluminum
alloy Al6061-T6. Between the two containers, there is a channel, 300mm width and
85mm height, for the proton beam and Tungsten target. There are 6 horizontal opens
totally for cold neutron extraction, with 110mm height. The surfaces of the horizontal
opens for DPHM and DWM cover a Cd layer as liner.
1.4.3.2 Strength calculation
The strength calculation on reflector just focuses on the two containers, and the
calculation result is listed in Table 1.4-9. The stress and deformation on the containers
are shown in Fig. 1.4-19.
55
Fig. 1.4-18. Configuration of reflector in CSNS
(a) upper container
(b) lower container
Fig. 1.4-19. Stress and deformation distributions in reflector containers
56
Table 1.4-9. Strength calculation on reflector containers

Lower
Upper container
container
Design pressure 0.4MPa 0.4MPae
Allowable stress 65MPa 65MPa
WeldAllowable Stress 41MPa 41MPa
Allowable deformation 1mm 1mm
Max. stress 60.7MPa 64.8MPa
Max. deformation 0.9mm 0.5mm
1.4.3.3 Reflector cooling
The heat deposition in reflector calculated by MCNPX is about 43.75kW when

the proton beam power is 200kW, and the heat is removed by D2O coolant with flow
rate 108L/min. The preliminary consideration on the cooling channel in the reflector
is shown in Fig. 1.4-20.
Fig. 1.4-20. Cooling channel in reflector
1.4.4 Future plan and challenges

The next one and half year is the most important duration to finish the
engineering design. Three main jobs will be done as follows:
(1) To improve and perfect the preliminary design on moderators and reflector
according to the assessment opinions by this meeting.
(2) To accomplish the detailed engineering design on moderators and reflector
within one year, to study the machining process of DPHM and CHM by the way of
prototype.
(3) To find the solution on problems connecting to manufacturing of moderators
57
and reflector.
It is believed that there are three challenges to face up:
(1) Optimizing and improvement on moderator and reflector to meet the needs
on neutron performance.
(2) Machining and manufacturing of DPHM and CHM.
(3) Engineering solution on bimetal conjunction, which used in connection
between transfer pipes and the moderator vessels. In CSNS, the most transfer pipes
are made of stainless steel, and the moderator vessels are made of aluminum.
58
1.5 HELIUM VESSEL

Wei He (hewei99@ihep.ac.cn)
The helium vessel system encloses the Target-moderator-reflector assembly

(TMR) to limit the production of activated gas, to provide hydrogen gas containment
in case of a cryogenic moderator failure. The vessel system includes a void vessel,
interfaces of TMR, mobile shielding, support system and service trolley that carry on
the assembly together. Fig.1.5-1 shows the spatial distribution of the vessel system.
The void vessel includes 18 neutron beam ports, a proton beam port and a TMR
service port. The material used for the neutron windows is Aluminum A6061T6, the
window seals would be exposed to high levels of radiation and accommodate the
deflections, so Helicoflex seals are chosen to seal neutron windows. Pillow seals are
used to seal the TMR service port, as which is convenient for removal and
replacement of TMR system by remote handling systems.
Fig. 1.5-1. Vessel system
The operating environment inside the vessel will be either helium at slight
sub-atmospheric pressure or rough vacuum(less than 133.3 Pa). The vessel is to be
evacuated below133 Pa before changing the TMR system in order to remove
corrosive nitrogen compounds produced by the proton beam in the helium. After
replacement, the region would be evacuated again to remove air from the region prior
to a helium gas fill and the start of beam operations. The vessel is also required to
hold a vacuum with a leak rate of less than 10-7 Pa m3/s. The vessel is protected from
overpressure by a rupture disc.. The void vessel is designed to withstand either
vacuum or an overpressure of 1atm (internal pressure between 0 and 2atm). In
operation, however, the void vessel rupture disc is set to actuate at 0.5atm pressure
over atmospheric. The drain line set at the bottom vessel allows removal any liquid
59
spilled into the void vessel.

Design parameters of the void vessel: volume is 8.7 m3; working temperature is
-195~50℃, working pressure is 1atm; working medium is helium with the purity of
99.95% or vacuum; design life is 30 years.
1.5.1 Void vessel
(1) Vessel structure

The void vessel is designed with a rectangular shape as to reduce the shielding
problem, and the vessel made from stainless steel 316 as this particular material dose
not deteriorate under high levels of radiation or corrosion, and it also has suitable
strength and toughness properties. The structure of the vessel is shown in Fig.1.5-2.
60
Fig. 1.5-2. Void vessel
61
The main body of the vessel is made from 30mm stainless steel, whilst the
side walls are 75mm. the overall dimensions of the vessel are 3m (L) × 1.69m (W)
×1.95m (H). It weights approximately 10.6t. According to the neutron beam angels
coming from the different 3 moderators, the side walls have 10 holes to install the
beam windows for 18 neutron beam lines,
Fig.1.5-3 shows the structure of the vessel flange. TMR assemblies are
supported and located by the vessel flange which the cryogenic lines, heavy water
lines, deionized water lines, vacuum lines, helium lines and signal wires pass through.
Numbers and kinds of lines passing through the vessel flange are shown in
Table1.5-1.
Table 1.5-1. Lines on the vessel flange

Cryogenic lines 2 2 for cryogenic moderators
Heavy water lines 4 loops 1 for target, 3 for reflectors
1 for decoupled ambient moderator,
Deionized water lines 2 loops
1 for pre-moderator
Helium and vacuum lines 2
Signal wires 3
Fig. 1.5-3. Vessel flange
Material of the flange is stainless steel 316, the overall dimensions are 2.55m (L)
×2.55m (W) ×0.1m (T). It weights approximately 5t. The round sealing face with
dimension of 2400mm is superior to the rectangular sealing face. The flange is shown
in Fig.1.5-3.
(2)Vessel strength analysis
The deflections and stresses of the vessel are analyzed by ANSYS. Various
62
designs with different thicknesses and structural enhancements are analyzed until the
deflections reduce to a reasonable level. Take the side walls with holes to be
investigated, when the internal pressure is 0.2MPa, the deflections and stresses are
shown in Fig.1.5-4~Fig.1.5-7, from the result, the maximum stress is 102MPa while
the maximum deflection is 0.418mm on the left side wall.
Fig. 1.5-4. Stresses on left side wall Fig. 1.5-5. Deflections on left side wall
Fig. 1.5-6. Stresses on right side wall Fig. 1.5-7. Deflection on right side wall
When the external pressure of the vessel is 0.1MPa, the deflections and stresses
are shown in Fig1.5-8~Fig1.5-11, from the result, the maximum stress is 48.4MPa
while the maximum deflection is 0.205mm on the right side wall.
63
Fig. 1.5-8. Stresses on left side wall Fig. 1.5-9. Deflections on left side wall
Fig. 1.5-10. Stresses on right side wall fig. 1.5-11. Stresses on right side wall
1.5.2 Proton beam port

Proton beam window forms the boundary between the high vacuum region of the
proton beam transport line and the helium environment around the TMR assemblies.
It is just located outside of the void vessel, approximately 2m from the target station
center. To facilitate replacement, pneumatic seals and a vertical assembly path are
incorporated in the proton window design. A finished flange face with the dimension
of 300mm and a surface roughness of 0.2μm is on the front-end of the void vessel.
1.5.3 Neutron beam windows

The material used for the neutron windows is Aluminum A6061T6. Helicoflex
seals shown in Fig.1.5-12 are chosen to seal neutron windows.
64
Fig. 1.5-12. Neutron window sealing structure
10 neutron beam holes with different sizes are on the vessel side walls. Take the
neutron window with the biggest dimension of 540mm (L)*149mm (W)*4.5mm (T)
for the analysis, when the internal pressure is 0.2MPa, the deflections and stresses are
shown in Fig.1.5-13~Fig.1.5-14, form the result, the maximum stress is 97.4MPa
while the maximum deflection is 0.447mm.
Fig. 1.5-13 stresses on neutron window. Fig. 1.5-14 Deflection on neutron

window
1.5.4 Sealing and supporting
(1) Inflatable seals

Inflatable-metal seals are used to seal the void vessel flanges by remote handling
under high radiation. Structure of the inflatable seal is shown in Fig.1.4-15, and which
mainly includes coaxial welding bellows, stainless steel foils and flanges. Stainless
steel foils are welded at the side of flanges, which give the inflatable seal its elastic
deformation.
Design requirements of the inflatable seal are as follow:
Material: stainless steel 316
Bearing pressure of bellows: 0~1MPa
Working pressure of the vessel: 133Pa~0.2MPa
Working temperature of the vessel:-20~50℃
Leak rate: 10-7 Pa m3/s
Elongation of bellows: 10mm
65
Thickness of foils: 0.2mm

Surface roughness of foils: Ra=0.2μm
Fig. 1.5-15. Inflatable seal
Installation and position of the inflatable seal is shown in Fig.1.5-15. Inflatable

seal is installed on the vessel flange by pins.
66
Fig. 1.5-16. inflatable seal installation and position
Work principle of inflatable seal: the sealing is based on elastic deformation of

stainless steel foil, and the inflatable stainless steel bellows ensure a permanent
contact between the flanges.
(2) Vessel supporting
Fig.1.5-17 shows the supporting parts of the vessel system, the void vessel
mounts on the vessel trolley while the vessel flange is fixed on the mobile shielding
which mounts on the shielding trolley.
Fig. 1.5-17. Supporting of the vessel system
1.5.5 Supporting system

The CSNS target team has chosen an all-horizontal target/moderator/reflector
arrangement. The horizontal service trolley will contains all the active core target
components like the void vessel, TMR assembly, shielding assembly and cryogenic
and water loop equipments used for the TMR cooling, that makes the TMR
assembly can be easily retracted into the target remote handling cell. It also reduces
the complexity of the shielding and reduces the need for overhead handling.
As indicated in Fig1.5-18, the service trolley with total length approximately
24m includes four parts: a vessel trolley, a shielding trolley, a cryogenic trolley and
a chilled water trolley. The dimensions of which separately are 2.9m*1.6m, 4m*2.8m
(2m*2.8m), 4.5m*6.3m, 5m*6.3m. Target station center is 6m far from the hot cell.
67
Fig. 1.5-18. Service trolley
68
Design requirements of the service trolley are as follow:

Working environment: dry air
Load: approximately 300t
Service trolley weight: approximately 200t
Travel route of the trolley: 8.75m, Fig1.5-19 shows two positions of the
trolley, operation and service.
Transport speed: <1200mm/min
Position accuracy: forward is±1mm, backward is ±5mm.
Operation position:
Service position:
Fig. 1.5-19. Two position of the trolley
The service trolley also equips with driving system, transmission system, buffers,
braking system, controlling system, monitoring system and warning system.
1.5.6 Interfaces with other systems

Proton beam transport line; cryogenic system; chilled water systems; utility
systems; shielding system.
69
1.6 SHIELDING
Wen Yin (wenyin@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
CSNS will run at 100kW in its phase I and will approach 200kW-level in Phase
II with the proton energy 1.6GeV. When the proton beam bombarded the tungsten
target, the energies of the cascade neutrons may approach the energies of the incident
protons. These high-energy neutrons are extremely penetrating, and well-designed
shielding is needed to prevent them from causing excessive biological dose rates. It is
important that structural shielding be properly designed and installed in the original
construction because correction or additions, after facilities are completed, are usually
expensive.
We have performed the shielding design for CSNS target station based on the
two different methods MCNPX [3] and DOORS [4]. Besides HILO2K [5], a new
neutron and photon data library HEST1.0 with DORT was also used. We find that
adding a thin concrete layer in the steel structure is more efficient to shield neutron
dose rate compared with the whole steel struture.
The targe station will provide 18 beamlines fo the neutron scattering experiments.
Each line will have an independently operable shielding shutter under the control of
the experimenters. For the shutter drive system, the hydraulic system has been
choosen by learning the lessons from ISIS TS-1. Furthermore, the mechanical
turnable supporting block has been designed to keep the reliability and accuracy for
shutter’s positioning.
The target station base plate is very important for the installation and positioning.
The fixed shielding components on the base plate are primarily composed of large
steel blocks with a lot of irregular shapes, the total weight of the steel will be
thousands of tons. The interface of shielding with other system like helium
container and the trolley, the proton beam transport tunnel has to be well designed .
Figure 1 shows the CSNS target station shielding structure.
1.6.1 Neutronics design

The Monte Carlo particle transport code MCNPX with a variety of variance
reduction techniques is very suited for shielding design especially for analysing
geometrical complex system. For the simplified 2-D CSNS target station shielding
design, we also use the deterministic discrete ordinates transport code DOORS. We
had performed a simple test calculation to compare these two codes: MCNPX and
DOORS/HILO2K/HEST1.0. The newly developed cross section library HEST1.0
contains 301 total energy groups, 81 high-energy neutron, 172 low-energy neutron
and 48 photon groups. For iron or low-carbon steel as in our case, the coarse group
structure below 20MeV will cause sharp dips in the neutron spectrum corresponding
to each resonance region. In order to obtain reliable results a corrected cross section is
implemented in HEST1.0 for iron of natural isotopic composition.
70
Fig. 1.6-1. CSNS Target station shielding design sketch
Here we give the primary shielding calculation based on DORT/HEST1.0, where

the neutron source term is supplied by MCNPX calculation. Figure 1.6-2 is the flow
chart of this calculation sequence. To mitigate ray effects, GRTUNCL is used to
calculate the uncollided flux and the first scattering source throughout the model.
Then two-dimensional discrete ordinates neutron/photon transport code DORT in
DOORS using the first scattering source completes the transport calculation.
Fi. 1.6-2. calculation flow diagrams for shielding analyses
71
Figure 1.6-3 is the 2-D calculation model. The target station monolith is
cylindrical in shape with the target located at the center of the monolith and 200 cm
above the bottom. The shutters are positioned on each neutron beam line
approximately 250 cm from the center. For simplifying, the TMR only consists of a
tungsten target, a beryllium surrounded by stainless steel reflector.
Fig. 1.6-3. CSNS TS monolith model
MCNPX calculates the neutron spectrum escaping from the reflector surface (see
Fig.1.6-4) as the source term. Figure 1.6-5 gives the DORT results and it shows five
meter thick steel adding 1 meter thick heavy concrete is enough for shielding 100 kW
target station. The total dose rate is 0.30μSv/h and this result basically agrees with that
based on the Monte Carlo method that is 0.50μSv/h for 200kW-level spallation
neutron source. Thus we choose 5-meter thick steel backed by 1-meter heavy concrete
as CSNS TS shielding baseline.
1E-3
1E-4
Flux (1/cm2/lethargy)
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
1E-6 1E-5 1E-4 1E-3 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Neutron energy (MeV)
Fig. 1.6-4. the neutrons leaking spectrum from the reflector cylindrical
surface
72
Fig. 1.6-5. the dose rate with the distance from the center
A relative high density in conjunction with low cost and economical attraction
makes steel an attractive shielding material. However, 56Fe ( iron is 91.7 percent 56Fe )
has an important deficiency in shielding neutrons that its main property is to slow
down neutron with energy above 847 keV via inelastic scattering reactions, whilst
below this threshold neutron can only lose its energy via elastic scattering, a very
inefficient process. Consequently, there is a build-up of neutrons below this energy.
Moreover, iron has some regions where the total cross section is very low in 56Fe: at
24.5keV where the minimum cross section is below 0.01barn and at 73.0keV where
the minimum cross section is below 0.1barn (see the data from ENDF/B-VII.0). The
effect makes the attenuation length much longer than the high-energy attenuation
length. In the target shielding design, we had considered a sandwich structure to
compensate this deficiency. Figure 1.5-6 is the MCNPX geometrical model. We add
two concrete layers in the steel bulk shielding. One is located above the target centre
250cm with its thickness 30cm; the other is located above the centre 475cm with its
thickness 25cm. Our previous results show that this sandwich structure is much more
efficient to shield neutrons and gamma dose rate than the integrated steel (see
Figure1.6-7). Here we give the neutron and gamma currents escaping from surface
113,114,117,118, and 119 to show this structure that the concrete (or other
hydrogenated material) is backed the steel in the different position absorbs the
surviving lower energy neutrons which do decrease the dose rate sharply (see figure
1.6-8). The above results show this sandwich structure do compensate the
disadvantage of the steel and our stress/strain analysis shows this structure is
engineering available.
73
Fig. 1.6- 6. the MCNPX model for CSNS TS shielding
(a)
(b)
Fig. 1.6-7. the neutron and gamma dose rate on the direction normal to the
proton beam line. (a) the neutron dose rate (b) the gamma dose rate for the
sandwich structure shielding respectively.
74
(a)
0.01
s113
s114
Neutron Intensity (n/proton/legthy)

s117
1E-4
1E-6
1E-8
1E-4 1E-3 0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Energy (MeV)
(b)
1E-3
1E-5
S113
γ (1/proton/legthy)
S114
S117
S118
1E-7
S119
1E-9
1E-11
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Energy (MeV)
Fig. 1.6-8. (a) the neutron current escaping from surface 113,114,117 and (b)
the gamma current escaping from surface 113, 114, 117, 118, and 119.
1.6.2 Shielding structure
1.6.2.1 Fixed shielding components
The fixed shielding components shall be designed to mainly meet the physical,
functional and structural requirements of shielding system during normal and
off-normal operating conditions. Main design principles are briefly considered as
follows: reliable structural strength, proper material (e.g. carbon steel, cast steel, etc),
easy manufacture (tolerances resulting from manufacturing processes shall be
considered along with the assembly and construction tolerances), convenient for
positioning, fixed & lifting, minimized cost, etc. The shielding components shall be
installed with the 50T crane of Target Station Hall. Installation gap for the fixed
shielding components is 10mm including shutters and fixed shielding blocks, which
the gaps are 20mm & 30mm between Helium Vessel and side & top shielding
75
components, respectively. As shown in Fig.1.6-9
Opening for Helium Vessel
Helium Vessel
Service Trolley
Fig. 1.6-9. the gaps between Helium Vessel and fixed shield blocks
The foundation shielding and load-bearing requirements should be taken into

account during the shielding design for the target station base. Target station has a
most demanding requirement for foundation. Target station foundation is located in a
circle of 10m diameter, supporting the weight about 6,000 tons. The foundation
structure design is shown in Figure 1.6-10.
Instr. Floor Instr. Floor

±0.000
Base Plate(80T)
Reinforced Concrete
Cast Iron Base layer
Foundation Waterproof Concrete
Fig. 1.6-9. foundation shielding design of target station
(1) The base plate

Base Plate is an important base of the entire equipments and components or parts
inside target station for the installation and positioning. Base plate uses the
block-assembly structure design, synthetically considering manufacturing, transport
and cost factors, etc. Base plate initial design is shown in Fig. 1.6-11.
(2) Interface Structure with the Proton Transfer Line
The fixed shielding components of target station shall provide the horizontal
channel to helium vessel for the proton beam tube of RTBT, as shown in Fig.1.6-12.
Based on the way of maintenance for PBW, target station shielding blocks shall also
provide the vertical opening for the PBW plug from the bottom of the support base to
the sealing flange at the top of target station.
76
安装要求:
1.基板沿束流方向逆时针编号，即BP01-BP06；
2.安装基准为靶站的中心线（沿束流和垂直束流方向）,基板与基准A之间的夹角为
29°，安装间隙为10mm;
3.安装工艺：
①水平方向的定位：以靶站中心为基准点，调整基板（如BP01）一边（或分割线）
与基准A的夹角为29°（或65.25°）,并确定间隙块定位孔及基线的位置;施工过程
中，利用专门设计的套板临时定位和固定基板间的间隙块定位孔，以保证基板的位
置度要求；
②垂直方向的定位：采用三点平面定位，利用三个调整螺栓，调整基板水平度，达
到要求的标高（以大厅地面为零标高，基板上平面标高为-0.6m）后，并在基板下局
部加调整块；
③基板的定位后，进行灌浆，为减少灌浆过程中灌浆压力（一般较小）对基板水平
度的影响，在基板上放置压板保证灌浆过程中基板的稳定(三个灌浆孔不同时进行灌
浆，其中一个用于浇注排气孔)。
安装间隙
Installing Gaps
吊装螺孔
Hoisting Bolt Hole
Shutter间隙块定位销孔
Interstitial Blocks Pitch Holes
中心屏蔽基座定位孔
Centre Shieding Pitch Holes
调整螺栓孔
Adjusting Bolt Holes 灌浆孔
Grout Pumping Holes
ISOMETRIC VIEW
WEIGHT: 24 TONS
BasePlate-Assy SolidWorks
Fig. 1.6-11. the base plate initial design
Fig. 1.6-12. the interface structure between PBW Plug and shield blocks
The opening space for the PBW plug is installed vertically. According to the
external structure of plug and avoiding the stream effect, the opening structure of
fixed shield is designed to step-like structure. Meanwhile, movable shielding blocks
are designed to meet the sealing requirements and facilitate the lifting. Interface
structure design with shielding blocks is shown in Fig.1.6-13. On the basis of meeting
the requirements for shielding function, adequate strength and stiffness, the main
design requirements or conditions shall be also considered the following:
77
① Design datum for interface structure of the opening: Level datum – the
proton transfer line (1.8m height from the ground of Experimental Hall), vertical
datum – the baseline (2m from target station center).
② The value of installation gap is 10mm between the plug and the fixed shield.
③ The guide ways at the interface shall be designed for easy installation and
removal for the plug.
④ The base of plug is used for positioning and fastening the plug on the fixed
shield blocks, therefore, the faces mated with plug require a higher machining and fit
precision(refer to manufacturing requirements: levelness≦0.8mm, flatness≦0.4mm,
surface roughness ≦6.3μm).
⑤ The face mated with sealing flange at the top of plug has proper levelness
and verticalness requirements.
⑥ Shielding blocks at the top of plug inside target station shall be designed for
movable structure(material using steel and heavy concrete), and utility system
pipelines and connects (including cooling water, vacuum, pressure and electrical
signal lines, etc) are also packaged inside shielding blocks.
⑦ The seal between movable shield and fixed shield utilized the sealing
membrane structure with a coated fabric to prevent the overflowing activated air from
the gap of interface.
Movable Shielding
Movable Shielding Blocks Blocks Position
Sealing Flange
for Plug Position
PBW Plug
Position
P.B.Tube Interface with PBW, HV&Trolley

Interface with the front
shield on the Trolley
Collimator PBW
P.B. Position Position
Trolley Rail Base
Fig. 1.6-13. Design sketch for interface structure with P.B., PBW &Trolley
(3) Interface Structure with Helium Vessel and Trolley

The fixed shielding components inside target station provide the opening for the
insertion of helium vessel and service trolley (see Fig.1.6-14). Also, the base shielding
at the opening must provide a stable foundation for the rail system of service trolley.
78
Opening for
Rail base ventilation inlet
Fig. 1.6-14. Rail foundation of service trolley
The structural design of interfaces with helium vessel and trolley is shown in
Fig.1.6-15, the main principles and requirements shall be considered as follows:
① Base on the current design of helium vessel & trolley system and ventilation
cooling inside target station, opening size provided by the fixed shield blocks is
1730mm(W)×2755mm(H).
② The base shielding for the rail foundation should meet the requirements of
better strength & stiffness and adequate stability. In addition, the base shielding
blocks provide the openings for vent inlet of ventilation system (cooling helium vessel,
shutters and surrounding shield blocks).
③ The front shielding blocks on the trolley(the front shield 1 and the front
shield 2) are to connect target station and hot cell, where fit clearance for interface
structure is desgined for 10mm including the clearance for sealing flange of helium
vessel, side and top clearance of the front shielding blocks.
Hot Cell
Interface with RTBT Interface with

HV & Trolley
Fig. 1.6-15. The structure of interface between shield blocks and trolley
79
1.6.2.2 Shutter system
Shutter system consists: shutter gate, shutter drive system and its auxiliary
facilities and the control system.
(1) Shutter gate
Here we focus on the material choice for the shutter neutron beam stop. The
design goal is 10μSv/h dose rate 10 meter from the moderator face. Figure 1.6-16 is
the calculation model and the results. We compare the dose rate between two
materials: 0.5m W plus 1.5 m SS316 and 2 m SS316. The results shows that the total
dose rate is 0.63μSv/h for W plus SS316 , and 8μSv/h for SS316 (see Fig.1.6-16).
Steel adding polythene is more efficient for shielding neutron dose rate than steel;
however in commpare with all hydrogenous materials, polythene presents the
difficulty that thermal neutron capture in hydrogen leads to a buildup of 2.2MeV
photons, which transform a neutron shielding problem to gamma shielding problem.
SS316 has been choosen as the neutron beam stop material by considering the cost
and engineering difficulty..
Fig. 1.6-16. Isodose Contours of stainless steel 316 Shutter Neutron Beam
Stop
(2) Shutter drive system

Learning the lesson from ISIS TS-1, the hydraulic system has been choosen as
the drive system. Furthermore, the mechanical turnable supporting block has been
used to keep the reliability and accuracy of the positioning. The shutter drive system
consists: hydraulic drive facility, shutter gates, top shielding block, turnable
supporting block, bridge beam assembly, alignment guide, shutter base plate Figure
1.6-17 shows the shutter drive system and figure 1.6-18 shows the up position and
down position of the shutter gate.. The hydraulic drive manifold provide the lifting
and lowing capabilities and the speed control of the shutter gate. The mechanical
80
turnable supporting provides the reliability and accuracy of the shutter gate. The
hydraulic drive facility is shown in figure 1.6-19.
Fig. 1.6-17. the shutter system structure: 1 shutter gate, 2 drive rod, 3 bridge
beam assembly, 4 cylinder; 5 turnable supporting block; 6 gear, 7 step motor, 8
control manifold and 9 alignment guide
(a) (b)
Fig. 1.6-18. two positions of the shutter gate (a) up position; (b) down
position.
81
Fig. 1.6-19. shutter drive circuit
(3) Shutter control system

The shutter control system keeps the reliability and the accuracy of the shutter
gate (see figure 1.6-20). The design goal includes: travel 400mm with a
opening/closing time < 2min; reproducibility of the shutter positioning is 6mm; and
stop in time during the running and keep enough time.
Fig. 1.6-20. the shutter control system
82
1.6.3 Interfaces with other systems

Shielding interfaces with other systems include: the interfaces with proton
transfer line, the remote handling system, moderator and reflector system, neutron
guide system, experiment utility system, experiment control system, neutron
scattering instruments and utility.
83
1.7 REMOTE HANDLING SYSTEM

Xuejun Jia (Xuejun.jia@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
1.7.1 Function and purpose

CSNS will operate 5000 hours per year. Optimization of operating availability
and predictability, while protecting personnel, is the primary goal of the remote
handling systems for CSNS. Several techniques and operation experiences proven in
successful facilities throughout the world like ISIS, SNS and JSNS are applied to
assist the operators in meeting this mission.
Remote handling system will provide equipment to support the disposal of
contaminated and activated waste generated from the target systems. This includes the
replacement, transport and final storage of the used target, moderators and proton
beam window etc.. Additionally, remote handling will provide a means to handle the
activated and contaminated cooling water systems and other utility equipments
associated with the loops.
1.7.2 Requirement
The Remote Handling requirements will dominate the layout of the target area.
Remote handling of components must be included in the design of the components
from the outset. The main choice is between replacement of modules and replacement
of components, and this choice will depend on the frequency of replacement,
availability of Hot Cell facilities, the cost and complexity of service connections. For
the system designers, it should be always kept in minds that do not install any system
without a solution to the remote handling requirements.
The target team has identified normal and failure mode maintenance
requirements and will provide adequate tooling to ensure that repairs can be made
within time periods compatible with the overall availability requirements for the
facility. Table 3.1.6.1 tabulates the design basis time scales for some significant
maintenance elements of the CSNS target systems.
The as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) principle shall be used as
guidance for all personnel and contamination control operations in CSNS. Thus,
activated and contaminated equipment will be shielded for transport around the
facility and to the permanent storage site. Areas of potential contamination will be
isolated from the normal working area. Repair and replacement of active components
will be accomplished in the hot cell, service area, or radiation controlled area.
Similarly, provision shall be made to recover from unlikely potential accidents
involving the release of contaminated cooling water into the shielding region.
84
Table 1.7-1. Remote handling system design goal

Design lifetime Maintenance spare
time
A: Key Component
Target 3- 5 years ( 10 dpa) 10 days Yes
PBW 5 years (10 dpa) 10 days Yes
Shutter >20 years 10 days No
Helium Vessel >20 years (neutron 10 days No

window)
Moderator 3-5 years （ poison 10 days Yes

material)
Reflector >20 years 15 days no
B:
Normal maintenance
Cooling water system 1-2 years 3 days Yes
Monitoring instruments 1-2 years 3 days Yes
Routine maintenance Half a year 3 days Yes
For the remote handling system, the horizontal trolley that contains all the core
target components (ISIS concept) initially appears to be the most obvious choice. This
arrangement places all the active components in a single assembly that can be easily
retracted into the target remote handling cell. It also reduces the complexity of the
shielding and reduces the need for overhead handling. In CSNS Target station design，
The CSNS target team has chosen an all-horizontal target/moderator/reflector and
associated cooling loops arrangement, See Fig.1.7-1.
85
Fig. 1.7-1. CSNS horizontal maintenance trolley
In general, the maintenance tasks for CSNS remote handling system can be
divided into two types. First case is associated with the Target-moderator-reflector
(TMR) replacements, the activation and contamination levels will be very high and
attention must be given to isolating maintenance operations from the environment and
personnel, these works has to be done in hot-cell by through-wall manipulators. For
CSNS, the planning for the replacement of individual components like target
replacement takes 10 days beam off to beam on: mostly it takes 3 days for
cool-down and preparation of cell, 4 days for remote handling, 1 day for leak testing
and another 2 days to return to operating conditions and cool down cryogenics. For
the moderator replacement it takes about 10 days beam off to beam on following the
exactly same working procedure.
The second case is the maintenance of TMR associated utility system , like
water cooling loops (heavy and light water), cover gas system etc., components will
normally not have significant amounts of contamination and therefore emphasis will
be placed on protecting personnel from activation, most of work could by done by
hands on in the service area with appropriate additional radiation protection means.
Some components like shutter and PBW need to be removed vertically from the top of
target monolith; their maintenance work has to be performed in special area by the
transportation with the specially designed transfer cask. The CSNS hot-cell and
service area arrangement plan is shown as Fig. 1.7-2 and Fig. 1.7-3.
86
8.75m Maintenance Cell
Target Station Remote Handling

Core Hot Cell TMR
Center Trolley
Vessel
Fig. 1.7-2. CSNS hot-cell and service area arrangement plan (cross-section view)
After a certain operation period of CSNS target station, different kinds of wastes
like solid waste; liquid waste and waste gas will be produced. For the solid waste like
used target and moderator vessel, after the replacement in hot-cell, they will be stored
in the hot-cell storage well for about 1-2 years, then put into a shield cask, and be
transported through the service tunnel to the basement storage place. The liquid waste
will be very few and will be collected and send to the CSNS central waste process
place for final disposal. For the waste gas, the actived gas from shutter vessel will
ventilated to the proton beam transport tunnel and to the central exhaust stack finally.
The gas from hot-cell and service area will be ventilated through the separate
ventilation system and disposal from the target building stack to the air before the
high efficiency filter and the final radiation inspection and control.
Hoisting Wells
TS Centre
Hot Cell Maintenance Cell
Fig. 1.7-3. CSNS hot-cell and service area arrangement plan
87
1.7.3 Remote handling system design
1.7.3.1 Hot-cell
A dedicated hot cell will be located behind the target monolith for the purpose of
maintaining the highly activated target components, mainly the TMR assembly and
helium vessel (neutron windows). The hot-cell size is about 5 m in width, 5 m in
length and 6.0 m in height, the wall of the hot-cell is 1.2-m-thick heavy concrete
shielding walls, the maintenance work will normally be performed via through-wall
remote manipulators, dry lead-glass windows, and closed-circuit television. Special
lighting will be used to assist with the replacement of target components. A stainless
steel liner with floors and walls shaped to channel coolant spills to a central collection
sump. The target cell will also be equipped with a kit of conventional remote handling
tools for certain maintenance purpose. In the hot-cell, two of storage well is designed
for the intermediate storage of used component like used target and moderator vessels.
Two couples of through-wall-mounted manipulator see Fig.1.7-5; will be
positioned at a lead-glass window, see Fig.1.7-4, on both side of the hot-cell, to
provide two-arm each side of full coverage in the primary work area of the target cell.
The 5 tons bridge crane will also be able to operate in the same area as required to lift
or retain components.
Fig. 1.7-4. lead glass window for hot-cell
88
Fig. 1.7-5. through-wall-mounted manipulator
Lighting and viewing are critical features of hot cell operations; thus an array of
camera positions will be built into the cell and maintenance tooling. These include
critical locations such as manipulator wrists, shoulders, as well as general stand-back
room viewing. The cameras shall be configured for remote replacement with the
in-cell systems. Local lighting will be provided with the appropriate cameras; general
cell lighting will be provided by conventional facilities. The radiation resistance will
be 108 rads (integrated dose) for all components except cameras. Fig. 1.7-6 shows a
set of radiation resistant CCD camera.
Fig. 1.7-6. radiation-resistance CCD camera
1.7.3.2 Service area
The service area is Located behind the hot-cell, housing the horizontal trolley
with almost all of utilities system for the target station. This service area will be
designed to have maximum flexibility and will therefore be used for both fully remote
and hands-on operations needed to support hands-on maintenance of all water cooling
system components and part of the cryogenic system. The cell will measure 9 m in
width, 24.5 m in length, and 8 m in height (see Fig. 1.7-3).
89
The cell will have a set of tools similar to the hot cell but no manipulators,
including a bridge crane, remote operation tools, cameras, and lights. A floor-mounted
rail system will provide a means of moving and positioning the 200 tons heavy trolley
during operations. The service area will be taller than the hot cell to accommodate
higher two-layer trolley structure. It will also include a sectioned ceiling to enable the
cell to be opened for maintenance functions not requiring remote handling.
1.7.3.3 Service tunnel and basement waste storage room
Under the service area, there is a basement specially designed for the utility
system and long-term waste storage. The basement area consists of equipment area for
the drain tank, cover gas system for heavy water cooling loop etc., and also the
storage place for the long term storage for the high radioactive waste from the target
station. The basement area is connected with the hot-cell and service area through the
service tunnel. Fig. 1.7-8 shows the layout of the basement and the service tunnel.
Target Station Hot Cell hatch
Hot Cell
tunnel
pipes collected
area
Equipment
Detected
Room
Equipment Waste
Area Storage
Area
Service Area
Maintenance
stair well hatch stair well
Room
& elevator basement
hatch
Fig. 1.7-8. The layout of the basement and the service tunnel.
The lifetime of CSNS target is designed for about 3-5 years considering of
radiation damage of vessel materials (SS316, 10 dpa), and the lifetime of decoupled
and poisoned moderator is depend on the burn-up of the poisoned material (Cd) in the
moderator, normally designed as about 3-5 years, in order to keep the same
maintenance period as the target. The replacement of both the target and decoupled
moderator are performed by manipulators in the hot-cell by replacing the target and
moderator with the new target assembly and moderator vessel spares. The used
component will be first put in the hot-cell storage well and cooled down for about 1-2
years, then transferred in the specially designed shielding cask to the basement storage
90
place through the service tunnel for the long term storage. The additional shielding
and also the portable manipulator will be available if remote operations are required in
the basement and the service tunnel. If further analysis demonstrates that significant
remote operations will be normal, the maintenance system for this area will have to be
enhanced.
1.7.4 Service area above the proton beam transport tunnel

Above the proton beam transport tunnel inside the experimental hall, there is
special designed service area called as platform above proton beam transport tunnel.
This area is specially designed for the maintenance of large component like shutter
and proton beam window plug etc. It could be also used to set for part of the control
cabinet of shutter, vacuum pump, and shutter maintenance cask and transfer
equipments, ventilation equipments etc. The platform consists of three parts, the
middle part is movable and exactly on the proton beam line, the other two parts are
symmetric and with fixed structure.
Fig. 1.7-9. The layout of the platform.
1.7.5 Upgrade consideration

In general, a remote handling system is not expected to require significant
upgrades or enhancements when the CSNS beam power upgrade to 200kW or even
higher. However, it is assumed that additional beam power will result in more
activation of the core components; thus somewhat heavier shielding containers may
be required to transport the components. Since the containers are generally
constructed on an as-needed basis, the need for heavier containers should not present
either a cost or time penalty
91
1.8 CRYOGENIC SYSTEM

Guoping Wang (wanggp@ihep.ac.cn)
1.8.1 Introduction
The CSNS cryogenic system consists of helium refrigerator, cryogenic hydrogen
circulation system and hydrogen safety system. A conventional design is applied on
the helium refrigerator, which consists of screw helium compressor and turbine cold
box. In this report, we focus on the design and fabrication of cryogenic hydrogen
system in this report.
The goal of the cryogenic hydrogen system is to provide a satisfied environment
for the neutron moderator. The basic requirements to the CSNS cryogenic hydrogen
system are:
 Supplying hydrogen temperature and pressure are around 20K and 1.4 to
1.5MPa.
 Average temperature in two moderators should be less than 20K.
 Temperature difference through the moderator should be less than 3K.
 Hydrogen moderator should have para-hydrogen concentration of more than
99%.
 The design should be reviewed by authorized committees and the law.
The cryogenic hydrogen system comprises two moderator vessels inside the core
helium vessel of the target; coaxial stainless steel transfer line to carry the cryogenic
hydrogen to and from major components; and in the hydrogen safety box, two
circulators (one standby), a heat exchanger, and an accumulator are installed. Since
hydrogen in the system is maintained at ~20K and above the critical pressure, it is
technically correct to refer to it as “supercritical” rather than : “liquid” hydrogen,
although the density is closed to that of liquid hydrogen. The circulator provides
motive power to move the supercritical hydrogen around its loop between the heat
exchanger and the moderator vessels in the helium vessel. Cryogenic helium
circulated through the heat exchanger removes heat that the cryogenic hydrogen
absorbs from surroundings and from incident gamma rays and neutrons.
The main parameters of the cryogenic system are listed in Table1.8-1. and the
target hall and the cryogenic system layout is shown in Figure 1.8-1. Figure 1.8-2
shows the schematic of the cryogenic system flow diagram.
92
Table 1.8-1. Main parameters of the cryogenic system

Flow rate 110g/s Flow rate 87.1g/s
HX HX 18.5-21.7
14.9-20.9K
Temperature Temperature K
Operational Operational
0.12-0.75 Hydrogen
Helium pressure of pressure of 1.5MPa
MPa circulation
Refrigerator compressor compressor
system
Design Design
2.5MPa 2.5MPa
pressure pressure
Refrigerator 2500W/21
Heat removal 2400W
capacity K
Fig. 1.8-1. The target hall and the cryogenic system
93
Fig. 1.8-2. Schematic of the cryogenic system flow diagram.
1.8.2 Helium Refrigerator
(1) Cooling Method

Helium refrigerator provide cold helium and cools hydrogen by the H2/He heat
exchanger, where only the heats transfer process, no mass transfer process.
(2) The Main Thermodynamic Parameters of Helium Refrigerator
In order to meet the thermal load demand of hydrogen in the corresponding
temperature, CSNS helium refrigerator requires three parameters: cooling capacity,
the minimum temperature of helium refrigerator and helium flow rate.
1) The Cooling Capacity of Refrigerator
The cooling capacity of Refrigerator is designed on the basis of dynamic thermal
load as a standard to require helium refrigerator to provide cooling capacity to
produce enough frequency and neutrons flux. The low-temperature cooling capacity
in CSNS requires 2200W @ 20K.
2) The Lowest Temperature Provided by the Refrigerator
The temperature requirement for Supercritical hydrogen: in the stable operation,
the hydrogen exit temperature requirements 18K, temperature difference of import
and export does not exceed 2.5K.
Helium refrigerator’s minimum temperature refers to the temperature of cold
helium gas which flows into the hydrogen-helium heat exchanger, rather than the
minimum temperature of entire helium refrigeration cycle.
Taking ΔTH2,He into account the temperature difference of heat transfer of
hydrogen-helium heat exchanger, the minimum temperature of helium:NormallyΔ
TH2,He does not exceed 2K, and the helium temperature is much higher than its critical
temperature, and need not liquefied, so it does not go through the throttling device, the
94
helium of the whole cycle is gaseous.

3) The Flow Rate Provided by the Refrigerator
The gas flow rate is also associated with stress-related in addition to
temperature-related. This is related to specific processes. In general, the same gas
temperature, the higher the pressure is, the less the need of the gas flow rate is.
(3) Requirements and Option Parameters of the Helium refrigerator
1) Requirements of the Helium refrigerator
 Required integrated performance values,
 Continuous operation time between scheduled maintenance,
 Refrigeration capacity flexibility and energy saving efficiency,
 Advanced turbo-expander technology,
 Capability of automatic absorber switch and regeneration,
 Low liquid nitrogen consumption rate,
 Low cold box return pressure drop,
 Low pressure fluctuation at the compressor suction,
 Robotic unmanned operation control,
 Comprehensive cryogenic instrumentation,
 proper design of interlocks
 High vacuum and low leakage rate of the cold box.
2) Purification of the Helium to be Cooled
The first load of helium to be used is 99,999 % of pure helium. The nominal
purity of processed helium is as follows :
 Moisture content < 1 ppm, (dew point < -76°C at Patm )
 N2 content < 1 ppm,
 O2 content < 1 ppm,
 Other impurities (CnHm, H2, Ne, etc…) < 1 ppm each.
3) The Flow chart of the Helium refrigerator
Figure 1.8-3 shows schematic of the helium refrigerator Flow diagram.
95
Fig. 1.8-3. Schematic of the helium refrigerator Flow diagram
4) Option Parameters of the Helium refrigerator

The helium refrigerator adopted CLAUDE Cycle with LN2 precool. Helium
refrigeration recycle consists of one helium compressor, one helium turbine, one main
recycle. The main parameters shown below:
 compressor suction pressure 1.15 bar
 compressor exhaust pressure 7.5 bar
 mass flow 110 g/s
 inlet temperate of the H2/He heater exchanger 15.68 K
 inlet pressure of the H2/He heat exchanger 1.67 bar
 outlet temperate of the H2/He heater exchanger 19.5 K
 consumption ofLN2 16.8 g/s
 the power ofcompressor 252 kW
 the power of turbine 3.9 kW
 vacuum of the cold box 10-6 Pa
5) Performance Data of the Helium Refrigerator
The performance data of the helium refrigerator has listed on table 1.8-2.
Table 1.8-2. the performance data of the helium refrigerator

Helium refrigerator Without LN2 With LN2
Refrigeration Capacity 1530W/19.6K 2200W/20.4K
6) T-s Diagrams
Figure 1.8-4 and 1.8-5 show the T-s diagrams of the helium refrigerator with
LN2 and without LN2 precooling.
96
Fig. 1.8-4. T-s Diagram for the helium refrigerator with LN2
Fig. 1.8-5. T-s Diagram for the helium refrigerator without LN2
1.8.3 Cryogenic hydrogen loop system

The cold hydrogen loop comprises hydrogen-helium heat exchanger,
accumulator, pump, and ortho-para hydrogen converter (shown as Fig. 1.8-6). All of
these equipments are installed in the hydrogen cold box, which is set on the service
trolley in the target hall (shown as Fig. 1.8-7). Supercritical hydrogen flows
continuously through the transfer line between the hydrogen cold box and the
moderator vessel in the target station.
97
cold hydrogen loop
accumulator
refrigerator
helium
heat
exchanger
Moderator
vessel
pump
converter
DM CM
Fig. 1.8-6. Schematic of the cold hydrogen loop flow diagram
Fig. 1.8-7. Position of the cold hydrogen loop
(1) Thermal calculation of the cold hydrogen loop

The function of the cold hydrogen loop is using the flow of hydrogen to transfer
the energy. While transferring the dynamic heat load of neutron moderation, the cold
hydrogen loop will produce static heat load because of its low temperature. Well
design to transfer these heat loads is very significant to the uniformity of the system
temperature and the stability of the system pressure, and more important is that it can
improve the performance of neutron moderation. The foundation of all of these works
is well analyzing heat load distribution in the cold hydrogen loop.
1) Dynamic heat load
The heat load of cold hydrogen loop includes two parts: dynamic heat load and
static heat load. The dynamic heat load is produced in the moderator vessel, includes
the energy absorbed by moderator and the energy emitted in the nuclear reaction of
moderator vessel. In the moderation, the energy transfer from neutron to hydrogen
molecule, some of it is absorbed by para-ortho hydrogen conversion, and the rest raise
98
the hydrogen temperature as apparent heat. Some para-hydrogen will convert to

ortho-hydrogen because of physical reaction with neutron, and this process absorbs
energy. While in the ortho-para hydrogen converter, ortho-hydrogen will convert to
para-hydrogen again and release heat. Except for collision with hydrogen molecule,
neutron also reacts with aluminum atom, and release heat immediately and product
28
some radioelement, such as 13 Al , which will release heat in the succedent
disintegration. In conclusion, in the moderator vessel, most of the energy lost by

neutron will transfer to heat, and consist of the dynamic heat load of the cold
hydrogen loop.
CSNS uses two hydrogen moderator vessels, DM and CM, which product
neutron with different spectrums. And the dynamic heat load are also different, 640W
and 480W, respectively.
2) Static heat load
Static heat load is the heat leakage of every equipment and transfer line in the
cold hydrogen loop, includes the heat leakage of pump, converter, heat exchanger,
accumulator, moderator vessel, and the mechanical power of pump.
① Basic calculating model
In order to restrain the convective heat leakage, decrease the radiative and
conductive heat leakage, the cryogenic transfer line and equipments are coated with
multilayer insulation material and vacuumized. The apparent conductivity of
vacuumized multilayer insulation material is
λa = a ⋅ N 2 ⋅
Th + Tc
+b⋅ h
(
T + Tc (Th + Tc )
2 2
) 1.8-1
2 N
Where, λa is the apparent conductivity of the insulation material (W/(cm*K)), a
and b are the coefficients relative with the character of the insulation material
(dimensionless), N is the layer density (layer/cm), Th is the temperature of the hot
surface (K), Tc is the temperature of the cold surface (K).
As to the cryogenic transfer line and other equipments coated insulation material
with cylinder shape, the heat leakage is
2 ⋅ π ⋅ λa ⋅ l ⋅ (Th − Tc )
Q= 1.8-2
d 
ln 2 
 d1 
Where, Q is the heat leakage (W), l is the length (cm), d1 is the inner radius of
the insulation material (cm), d2 is the outer radius of the insulation material (cm).
As to equipments coated insulation material with plane shape, the heat leakage is
A ⋅ λa ⋅ (Th − Tc )
Q= 1.8-3
δ
99
Where, A is the surface area of the insulation material (cm2), δ is the thickness of
the insulation material (cm).
Normally, conductivity is the function of temperature. In cryogenic system, the
temperature difference is usually large, therefore, the conductivity should not be
considered as a constant. As to the transfer line and the support material which
connect low temperature end and room temperature end, the heat transfer is
Th A ⋅ λ (T ) ⋅ dT
=  ∫ λ (T ) ⋅ dT − ∫ λ (T ) ⋅ dT 
A Th Tc
Q=∫ 1.8-4
Tc l l  0 0 
Where, λ is the conductivity (W/(m*K)), ∫ λ (T ) ⋅ dT is the integral value of
heat conduction (W/m).

The moderator vessels and their inlet and outlet transfer line are only
vacuumized but not coated with multilayer insulation material for the reason of
radiation, the heat leakage are calculated as radiation heat transfer
Q0 =
A
σ ⋅ A1
 1 
(
⋅ Th − Tc
4 4
) 1.8-5
1
+ 1 ⋅  − 1
ε 1 A2 ε2 
Where, σ is Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.67×10-8W/(m2*K4)), ε1 is the
emissivity of the inner object (dimensionless), ε2 is the emissivity of the outer object
(dimensionless), A1 is the outer surface area of the inner object (m2), A2 is the inner
surface area of the outer object (m2).
The function of the pump is raising the hydraulic head of hydrogen to
compensate for the pressure loss in circulation, and in this process, the rotating
mechanical energy translates into the flow mechanical energy. However, the pump
efficiency can not be 100%, and some rotating mechanical energy dissipates and turns
into the internal energy directly in the pumping process. While in the circulation, the
flow mechanical energy continuously translates into the internal energy for
overcoming the flow resistance. So all of the rotating mechanical energy input by
motor to the impeller will translate into the internal energy of hydrogen, and be a part
of the heat load of the cold hydrogen loop. And this part of heat load is
Q ⋅ H
Qp = 1.8-6
η
Where, Q is the volumetric flow of the main transfer line (L/s), H is the
hydraulic head of the pump (kPa), η is the pump efficiency (dimensionless).
② Calculating results
The heat load of every part in the cold hydrogen loop can be calculated base on
the formulas mentioned above and the design of the transfer line and the equipments.
Table. 1.8-3 shows the results.
100
Table. 1.8-3. Heat load of the cold hydrogen loop

Dynamic heat load
No. Part Static heat load (W)
(W)
1 Cold box
1.1 Transfer line - 38.74
1.2 Equipments - 347.75
2 DM branch
2.2 DM 640 10.70
3 CM branch
3.2 CM 480 12.29
4 Bypass branch - 10.47
Subtotal 1120 756.90
Total 1876.90
30% design margin 2400
(2) Flow resistance calculation of the cold hydrogen loop

The destination of the cold hydrogen loop is transferring the energy by the flow
of hydrogen. The analysis and design on flow includes two aspects mainly, flow rate
determining and pressure loss analyzing. Larger flow rate leads to smaller temperature
increase, and the temperature distribution of the cold hydrogen loop is more uniform,
then a better performance of neutron moderation can be reached, but the pressure loss
of circulation is also larger. The length of the transfer line is almost fixed, and the only
parameter can be changed is the diameter of the transfer line after the flow rate is
determined and the equipments is designed primarily. Larger diameter means slower
flow velocity, smaller pressure loss. However, it also means larger hydrogen volume,
which is not welcomed from the point of safety and economy. In order to improve the
design, a bypass branch is adopted for distributary and flow rate regulation.
1) Flow rate calculation of cold hydrogen loop
According to the design guidelines of the cold hydrogen loop, the temperature
difference is below 3K. Therefore, the flow rate
Q
m = 1.8-7
c p ⋅ ∆t
Where, Q is the heat load (W), cp is the heat capacity at constant pressure
(J/(kg*K)), Δt is the temperature difference (K).
101
The total flow of main transfer line and the flow of DM branch and CM branch
are calculated by equation 1.8-7, and the flow of bypass branch can be obtained with
the ruler of conservation of mass. Table. 1.8-4 shows the results.
Table. 1.8-4. Main parameters of every part in the cold hydrogen loop
Heat load (W) Mass flow (g/s)
Main transfer line 1877 87.1
DM branch 640 49.4
CM branch 320 37.1
Bypass branch 10 0.6
2) Flow resistance analysis and calculation of the cold hydrogen loop

After the main parameters of every part are determined, the flow resistance can
be analyzed to accommodate the pressure drop.
① Basic formula
The local pressure loss of the media when flow through the connecter, such as
valve, tie-in, elbow, is
ν2
∆Pl = ξ ⋅ ρ ⋅ 1.8-8
2
Where, ξ is the local pressure loss coefficient (dimensionless).
As to the pressure loss along the line, Renaults number should be calculated first.
ν ⋅d ⋅ρ
Re = 1.8-9
µ
Where, v is the flow velocity (m/s), d is the inner diameter of the transfer line
(m), ρ is the density of the media (kg/m3), μ is the viscosity coefficient of the media
(Pa*s).
As to the coaxial transfer line (shown as Fig. 1.8-8), the section of the outer
passage is ring, and the equivalent diameter is adopted in the calculation
4⋅ A
de = 1.8-10
π ⋅ (d 4 + d 5 )
Where, A is the area of the transfer line section (m2), d4 is the inner diameter of
the outer passage (m), d5 is the outer diameter of the outer passage (m).
102
Fig. 1.8-8. Sketch map of the coaxial transfer line section
When Re<1×105, the friction coefficient of the transfer line can be calculated by
Blasius equation
0.3164
λ= 1.8-11
Re 0.25
When Re≥1×105, the friction coefficient of the transfer line can be calculated by
Colebrook equation
1 ∆/d 2.51 
= −2.0 log +  1.8-12
λ  3.7 Re λ 
Where, Δ is the roughness of the transfer line (m).
Therefore, the pressure loss along the line is
L ν2
∆Pw = λ ⋅ ⋅ρ⋅ 1.8-13
d 2
Where, L is the length of the transfer line (m).
② Calculating results of the pressure loss
The pressure loss of the cold hydrogen loop can be calculated base on the
formulas mentioned above, and the results are shown as Table. 1.8-5.
Table. 1.8-5. Calculating results of the pressure loss in the cold hydrogen loop.
Pressure loss Pressure loss
Total (kPa)
in transfer line (kPa) in equipments(kPa)
Cold box 3.24 51.28 54.52
DM branch 7.69 10.00 17.69
CM branch 4.93 10.00 14.93
Bypass branch 0.03 10.00 10.03
103
③ Total pressure loss of the cold hydrogen loop

Bypass branch, DM branch, CM branch are in parallel, but their pressure loss are
different (shown as Table. 1.8-4). Therefore, the pressure loss of every part should be
accommodated; otherwise the actual flow rate can not satisfy the demand of design
value. The pressure loss regulation is completed by regulating valve, which can also
regulate the flow rate. Consider the pressure loss and flow rate of these 3 branches,
the branch pressure loss is determined as 30kPa, and the total pressure loss of the cold
hydrogen loop is 84.6kPa.
(3) Hydrogen volume calculation of the cold hydrogen loop
The hydrogen volume can be calculated base on the equipments design and
transfer line distribution, and the result is shown as Table. 1.8-6.
Table. 1.8-6. Hydrogen volume calculation result of cold hydrogen loop

Volume Mass
(L) Subtotal (L) (kg) Subtotal (kg)
Transfer line 20.11 1.45
Cold box 74.61 5.39
equipment 54.50 3.94
DM branch 29.48 2.16
equipment 5.16 0.38
CM branch 32.10 2.35
equipment 6.00 0.44
Bypass branch 2.51 0.19
equipment 0.10 0.01
Total 138.69 10.09
(4) Design of the heat exchanger

The heat exchanger connects cold hydrogen loop and helium refrigerator, and
cryogenic helium flow through it to remove the heat absorbed by hydrogen from
surrounding and moderation. The structure is plate-fin, and Table. 1.8-7 shows the
design parameters.
104
Table. 1.8-7. Design parameters of the heat exchanger

Type Plate-fin
Material Alumium
Media H2 He
Mass flow 87.1g/s 100.7g/s
Inlet temperature 20.5K 16.2K
Outlet temperature 18K 19.7K
Allowed pressure drop 0.2bar 0.2bar
Operation pressure 15bar 1.4bar
(5) Design of the pump

The pump provide motive power for the flow of hydrogen. Table. 1.8-8 shows
the design parameters.
Table. 1.8-8. Design parameters of the hydrogen pump

Inlet pressure 14.5bar
Operation temperature 20K
Volumetric flow 1.2L/s
Hydraulic head 1bar
Efficiency 0.46
Mechanical power 0.18kW
Electrical power 0.22kW
When the cold hydrogen loop works stably, the rotate speed of pump is very high.
Before the cold hydrogen loop colding down, the hydrogen is with room temperature
and a small density, so the pump is demanded to operation at a smaller rotate speed.
And in the cold down time, the density increases with the fall of temperature, and the
rotate speed should raise accordingly to supply sufficient motive energy for the flow
of hydrogen. And the shift of the pump is completed by the transducer.
(6) Design of the accumulator
At the operation condition of 18~21K temperature and 1.5MPa pressure, the
pressure of the cold hydrogen loop will increase 1MPa when the temperature raise 1K.
And this huge pressure variation will risk the system operation if there is no pressure
regulating device. As a key equipment of the cold hydrogen loop, the accumulator is
used to minimize the system pressure swing to protect the equipments from damage.
In the accumulator, the main part to regulate pressure is a weld bellows, and
supercritical hydrogen and cryogenic helium are inside and outside of it respectively.
The pressure of the helium is maintained at 1.5MPa. When the pressure of
105
supercritical hydrogen raise with the increase of temperature, the inner pressure of
bellow is larger than the outer pressure, and the pressure difference will force the
bellows expand, therefore, the pressure of the supercritical hydrogen will fall to the
design value because of the increase of volume. Correspondingly, while the pressure
of supercritical hydrogen falls with the decrease of temperature, the inner pressure of
bellows is smaller than the outer pressure, and the pressure difference will force the
bellow contract, therefore, the pressure of supercritical hydrogen will raise to the
design value because of the decrease of volume.
The structure of accumulator is shown as Fig. 1.8-9, consists of vessel, bellows
volume compensator and displacement measure system. The bellows is deforming all
the time in the operation of the cold hydrogen loop and demanded to work a long time
in cryogenic environment, and this severe operation condition risks its life badly.
From the point of life and pressure level, the bellows with thicker wall can reaches
longer life and higher pressure level easily. However, thicker wall also means larger
elasticity coefficient, and longer length is needed to satisfy the demand of sufficient
volume compensation, and it also leads to bad precision of pressure regulation. These
factors should be considered synthetically. In order to monitor the running state of the
accumulator, a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) is set above the free
end of the bellows, whose displacement can be obtained by measuring the voltage
signal output from LVDT.
Fig. 1.8-9. Structure of the accumulator
As mentioned above, the hydrogen volume of the cold hydrogen loop is 140L.
When the average temperature raises 1K in the operation condition, a volume
compensation of 2.0L is demanded. Then, a weld bellows with 300mm diameter,
100mm length, 150N/mm elasticity coefficient is needed, and the maximum axial
deformation is 26mm.
(7) Design of the converter
In the neutron moderation, the para-hydrogen can get better performance than the
106
ortho-hydrogen for its larger neutron absorption cross section. In the hydrogen
moderator vessel, the para-hydrogen will convert to ortho-hydrogen while colliding
with neutron. The ortho-hydrogen can also convert to the pare-hydrogen under
cryogenic environment, but that is very slowly if there is no catalyst. Therefore, in
order to get well moderation performance and obtain the qualified neutron to well
match many scientific researches needs, the ortho-para hydrogen converter is needed
to maintain the high concentration of para-hydrogen.
In the conversion, the processes of the ortho-para hydrogen conversion and the
para-ortho hydrogen conversion are going at the same time. And after some time dt,
the ortho-hydrogen concentration change to dXO. These parameters match the
equation 1.8-14.
dX O
− = kX O − k ′(1 − X O ) 1.8-14
dt
Where, XO is the ortho-hydrogen concentraion, k is the ortho-para hydrogen
conversion rate constant (min-1), k ′ is the para-ortho hydrogen conversion rate
constant (min-1).
When the conversion is in equilibrium, the concentration of ortho-hydrogen and
para-hydrogen will maintain constant.
dX O
kX O − k ′(1 − X O ) = − =0 1.8-15
dt
Therefore,
kX O kX Oe
k′ = = 1.8-16
1 − X O 1 − X Oe
Where, XOe is the ortho-hydrogen concentration in the equilibrium hydrogen of
the reaction temperature.
Combining equation 1.8-16 and 1.8-14, the equation listed as follows can be
obtained.
dX O k ( X O − X Oe )
− = 1.8-17
dt 1 − X Oe
When t=0, the conversion does not begin, and the ortho-hydrogen concentration
is that in the incoming flow. Then, the solution of differential equation 1.8-17 is
kt
X O = (X Of − X Oe )e
−
1− X Oe
+ X Oe 1.8-18
Equation 1.8-18 can be translated into the equation listed as follows.
1 − X Oe −k −k −k
SV = = = = 1.8-19
t X O − X Oe  X − X  ln (1 − η )
  P
X Of − X Oe ln1 − X − X 
ln P Pf
 Pe Pf 
Where, SV is the space velocity of the ortho-para hydrogen conversion (L/min),
XP is the para-hydrogen concentration (%), XPf is the para-hydrogen concentration in
107
the incoming flow (%), XPe is the para-hydrogen concentration in the equilibrium
hydrogen of the reaction temperature (%), ηP is the ortho-para hydrogen conversion
efficiency (dimensionless).
In the design operation condition of the cold hydrogen loop, the inlet temperature
of converter is 20K, and the concentration of para-hydrogen in the equilibrium
hydrogen of this temperature is XPe=99.83%, inlet para-hydrogen concentration is
XPf=97%, outlet para-hydrogen concentration is XP=99%. Fe(OH)3 is used as the
catalyst, and its ortho-para hydrogen conversion rate constant is k=3500L/min. Then
the space velocity can be calculated by equation 7.3-20, SV=2853L/min. The mass
flow of the cold hydrogen loop is m = 87.1g / s = 5226 g / min , and the volumetric
flow is F=58067NL/min. Then the volume of the catalyst is

F
VC = = 20.3L 1.8-20
SV
The fill volume is 25L considering 20% margin.
(8) Operation mode
The cold hydrogen loop operates according to the processes listed as follows:
1) Cold down mode I (300K-80K)
In the cold down mode I, the helium of 80~300K is obtained by mixing room
temperature helium and 80K helium obtained by liquid nitrogen precooling. And then
the mixed helium flows through the helium-hydrogen heat exchanger to cold down
the cold hydrogen loop according to the rule of “double 50K”. While the temperature
falls, the pressure of cold hydrogen loop also goes down. Therefore, hydrogen should
be added to the cold hydrogen loop to maintain the pressure stable.
2) Cold down mode II (80K-18K)
The principia of cold down mode II is the same as cold down mode I. The
17~80K helium is obtained by mixing 80K helium obtained by liquid nitrogen
precooling and 17K helium obtained by turbine expansion. In this mode, hydrogen
should be charge into cold hydrogen loop, and the pressure should get special
attention to be maintained above the critical pressure to avoid the coagulation of
hydrogen when the pressure is below the critical pressure and protect the impeller of
pump from damage.
3) Standby mode
In the standby mode, there is no proton beam hit the target and no neutron flies
through the moderator vessel, therefore, there is no dynamic heat load but only static
heat load in the cold hydrogen loop.
4) Stable work mode
In the stable work mode, the proton beam hit the target and produce neutron,
which flies through the moderator vessel and bring dynamic heat load to the cold
hydrogen loop. In this mode, the cold hydrogen loop operates at the design heat load.
5) Warm up mode
In the warm up mode, the hydrogen pump should be stopped first, and then the
hydrogen discharging valve should be opened to release the pressure of the cold
hydrogen loop from 1.5MPa to 0.1MPa. A small part of the hydrogen is discharged
108
and the state of hydrogen change from supercritical to subcooled liquid. Then helium
of room temperature is charged into the cold hydrogen loop and increases the pressure
of liquid hydrogen, push the liquid hydrogen out of the cold hydrogen loop.
6) Emergency measure mode
Emergency state is the state in which any part of a system fails and influences the
normal work of the whole system.
① Power cut mode
When the electrical power is cut for some reasons, the UPS will provide enough
power to control system to last its work for several minutes to take the emergency
measure.
② Vacuum failure mode
When the vacuum of cryogenic equipments fails, the heat load will increase
rapidly, and consequently raise the temperature and pressure of the cold hydrogen
loop. Therefore, the emergency measure should be taken to protect the equipments.
③ Refrigerator failure mode
When helium refrigerator can not work for some reasons, the cold hydrogen loop
can not maintain cryogenic state, and its temperature and pressure will increase.
Therefore, the emergency measure should be taken.
1.8.4 Hydrogen safety System

As a colorless, odorless, non-toxic, inflammable and explosive gas, hydrogen has
a risk of explosion when mixed with fluorine, chlorine, oxygen, carbon monoxide and
air. When hydrogen is mixed with air, and the volume percent of hydrogen is among
4% ~ 74.2%, an ignition will produce an explosion, the volume fraction range is
called explosion limits.
CSNS cryogenic system uses low-temperature supercritical hydrogen to provide
the necessary cooling capacity for the target moderator. In order to prevent hydrogen
leaks, avoid fire or explosion accident, we need to design a security system, namely,
hydrogen safety systems. The system monitors the whole process of hydrogen storage,
transmission and use, to guarantee the cryogenic system running safely and stably,
thereby protecting the target station running safely and stably.
Because of the particularity of hydrogen, hydrogen safety system is designed
with defense in depth security design concepts, namely, a series of measures taken to
prevent accidents from occurring, monitoring the accident situation, and easing the
consequences of the accident. There is a Potential danger for hydrogen system that the
system’s leaking hydrogen mix with air (oxygen) and caused severe chemical reaction
(explosion or deflagration). Occurrence of such an accident must have the hydrogen,
oxygen and ignition energy of the three basic elements, namely hydrogen and oxygen
to form a combustible gas mixture, and just with enough ignition energy. Therefore,
defense in depth security design is to set up multiple barriers to isolate the link
between these three elements.
In terms of function, multiple barriers of the hydrogen safety system are divided
into two categories:
109
 Physical isolation: refers to the container, pipelines and other physical barrier
wall between the hydrogen and the environment;
 Failure detection system: When integrity of the physical isolation barrier has
been destroyed, they can promptly detect this failure and to take timely remedial
measures.
Hydrogen safety design, in general, should have up to 4 ~ 5 levels defense in
depth security design, namely:
The first level, minimize the possibility of the formation of flammable gas
mixture during the hydrogen circulation system running.
 Using high-purity hydrogen. Analyzing a sample before charging the
hydrogen and purifying the gas hydrogen before supply to the circulation system
under liquid nitrogen to reduce to the oxygen content to 0.1ppm or lower;
 Keeping the pressure of the hydrogen circulatory system constantly higher
than the atmosphere pressure, to ensure that the ambient gas not leak into the
hydrogen system, even if leaks of the physical barriers (pipe wall) occurs.
 All hydrogen-related equipment or pipes should have an inert gas blanket
outside to prevent the possible contact between the hydrogen and air.
 Purchase and manufacturing of all parts must be strictly implement quality
assurance programs to ensure product quality meeting the requirements.
The second level is the leak detection system. In case of failure of the first level
defense, the system should be able to detect leakage of hydrogen, so as to avoid the
further development of the accident. Main measures are:
 hydrogen impurities in the system is monitored online and real-time, while
sample tests conducted from time to time, To ensure that impurities do not exceed the
allowable value;
 Gas blanket pressure of the hydrogen system(vacuum layer) is closely
monitored whenever.
The third level, hydrogen circulation system is placed into a safe box to ensure
that any incident of hydrogen system will not jeopardize the security of the target
station and spectrometer hall.
The fourth level, hydrogen cold box is placed within a sealed explosion-proof
room, which has a separate ventilation and purification system, to ensure that
hydrogen leaks out of the hydrogen cold box would not spread outside the
explosion-proof room to jeopardize the security of the target station.
The fifth level, when all the defense boundaries of the hydrogen system fails,
some systems of the target station and spectrometer hall (ventilation and purification
systems, etc.) will provide defense capabilities to ensure that the accident would not
pose a threat to other buildings and public safety
According to defense in depth security design concept, all the hydrogen-related
equipment or piping should have a layer of gas blanket to prevent the possible contact
between hydrogen and air. Generally speaking, we use nitrogen or helium as the
protective gas. Nitrogen is used for room temperature hydrogen, while helium is used
for cryogenic hydrogen, because the nitrogen has the possibility of freezing under low
temperature. The leakage of hydrogen at room temperature is far less than the
110
low-temperature hydrogen, so as a gas blanket, nitrogen is enough to prevent the

hydrogen leak out or air leak in.
In the hydrogen supply system, there is a buffer tank, which is connected to the
accumulator of the hydrogen circulation. The temperature of the hydrogen buffer tank
is at room temperature, so it use nitrogen as a protective gas. The pressure of the
hydrogen buffer tank is stable at 1.5Mpa，which can minimize pressure fluctuation of
the accumulator.
Hydrogen transfer line at room temperature (temperature>70K) generally use the
nitrogen as a protective gas. The cryogenic transfer line (temperature <70K) use
helium as the protective gas. Structure is shown in Figure 1.8-10.
Fig. 1.8- 10. Structure of hydrogen transfer line
There is a vacuum layer outside of the Cryogenic hydrogen, and the outer helium
layers provide a protective buffer for the vacuum layer protective by minimizing the
possibility of in-leakage of contaminants (water or air, for example). If cryogenic
hydrogen accidentally leak out to the vacuum layer, it does not directly contact with
the atmosphere, which greatly reduces the possibility of mixing with the atmosphere.
The vacuum layer of the cryogenic transfer line should be rigorously monitored
and controlled. The commonly used instruments are vacuum gauge, quadruple-mass
spectrometers and helium leak detectors. If there is some gas (hydrogen or air) leak
into the vacuum layer, the vacuum gauge will detects the changes of vacuum degree,
and quadruple-mass spectrometer and helium leak detectors can distinguish the
leakage of gas is hydrogen or helium。In this way, the staff can take appropriate
remedial measures promptly.
The purpose of the design of a vent system is to discharge cryogenic hydrogen
safely and rapidly outside to atmosphere, and prevent the diffusion of outside air into
the system at the same time. Overall, the vent system should have three functions:
(1) The vent system should have a capacity of rapid discharge of hydrogen in the
hydrogen system. In a very short period of time, the vent system discharges the
hydrogen outside to the atmosphere, through the hydrogen vent line and vent stack.
Especially in emergency cases, the shorter the time it takes to discharge the hydrogen,
the safer the system will be;
111
(2) The vent system must be able to prevent the air mix with the hydrogen
through the hydrogen vent line. The hydrogen vent line is always full of helium and
nitrogen throughout the operation, which maintains a positive pressure, to prevent air
entering into it. The hydrogen vent line is equipped with a check valve and a flame
arrestor, preventing the fire cause by an accidental ignition spread to the system;
(3) Fully diluted will be needed for hydrogen before discharged outside the
hydrogen system. The cryogenic hydrogen goes through the hydrogen vent line into
the vent stack, at the side of which locates a fan to blow a lot of air diluting the
hydrogen concentration below lower explosive limit of 4%. The air that is blown into
the stack should exclude the presence of ignition sources.
Figure 1.8-11 shows schematic of vent system flow diagram, which consists of
high and low pressure manifold, a hydrogen vent line, and a stack.
Fig. 1.8-11. Schematic of vent system flow diagram
The high pressure outputs from the hydrogen circulation system, such as relief
valves, rupture disks and hydrogen vent port for the hydrogen loop, are connected to
the high pressure manifold. Helium gas as a purge gas flows in the high pressure
manifold throughout the operation to avoid air ingress into it, which avoids being
frozen when cryogenic hydrogen passing through. On the other hand, the low pressure
outputs from vacuum pumps and safety devices of the gas blanket are connected to
the low pressure manifold. Nitrogen gas used in the helium refrigerator as a
pre-cooling material is continuously purged through the low pressure manifold into
the hydrogen vent line, which can prevent air invasion to vent line.
In the design of the hydrogen vent line, the following conditions were imposed in
112
order to release the hydrogen safely even in the case of an off-normal event.
 The hydrogen temperature should be higher than the freezing point of the
purge nitrogen gas (65K) at the merge point of the nitrogen from the low
pressure manifold.
 The hydrogen temperature should be higher than the freezing point of
moisture (273K) at the stack.
 The outer surface temperature of the vent line should be higher than 250K at
the building wall penetration.
The temperature behaviors in the vent line during discharging the cryogenic
hydrogen were study by research scholars of the J-PARC. They found that the
cryogenic hydrogen was warmed up by exchanging heat with ambient air through the
vent line wall when it was discharged. As time advanced, the temperature rise of the
hydrogen gas became lower, the vent line temperature decreased.
Hideki Tatsumoto found that with the increase in piping thickness, the hydrogen
temperature rise became larger and the temperature drop of the vent line became
smaller, then the decrease of the vent line temperature should not small. Therefore, the
increase in the wall thickness of the pipe was effective in warming the hydrogen. By
drawing on engineering experience of J- PARC, an initial selection of CSNS
cryogenic system vent line materials is SS316L. The vent line length is about 100m,
pipeline specifications is DN140, of which outside diameter 159mm, wall thickness
7.0mm.
The cryogenic hydrogen goes through the hydrogen vent line into the vent stack,
which is the final passage before hydrogen is emitted into atmosphere. The outlet of
hydrogen stack should be designed for more than 2 meters above the roof around. The
stack should have the function of lightning and explosion-proof. Also, some measures
should be taken to prevent rainwater from entering or outside objects clogging the
stack.
There is a fan locates at the side of the stack to blow a lot of air diluting the
hydrogen concentration below lower explosive limit of 4%. In case of emergency
discharge of hydrogen, the fan should be started instantly, and blow a large amount of
air in a few seconds after start. The air flow rate should be high enough and exclude
the presence of ignition sources.
The role of flame arrester is to prevent an external fire into the equipment or
pipelines, in which there are inflammable and explosive gas exist. Flame arrester is
designed and manufactured, with the principle that a flame will be extinguished when
passing through a narrow pore of hot conductor because of the heat loss. The flame
arrestor of the hydrogen vent line is installed close to the vent stack, and should have
function of explosion-proof.
1.8.5 Outlook
The cryogenic system preliminary design has been carried out ; some new
designs and novel process have been adopted in the cryogenic hydrogen system. R&D
on accumulator is going on and a propotype will be fabricated in the summer, The
113
structure stability of accumulator will be studied in the next step.
114
2 NEUTRON INSTRUMENTS
115
2.1 HIGH INTENSITY POWDER DIFFRACTOMETER

Lunhua He (lhhe@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
2.1.1 Physical design

The high intensity powder diffractometer (HIPD) is one of three day-one neutron
instruments for CSNS, which is designed for most users to determine crystallographic
and magnetic structures in general purposes. Also it should keep capacity for the
structural studies on small samples, some phase transitions and real-time chemical
reactions. Therefore, the HIPD is designed with a best resolution Δd/d ~ 0.2% for
high angle detector bank, and the time cost to collect a typical “Rietveld-quality”
diffraction histogram will be in the order of minutes.
Fig.2.1-1 shows the schematic setup of HIPD and Table 2.1-1 gives the design
parameters of HIPD. This instrument consists of a 2 m long in-monolith guide, an 18
m long focus guide, a 4 m long straight guide, one T0-chopper and two bandwidth
choppers. The sample position is at 30 m and the sample to detector distance vary
from 1.5 m at 150°to 3.82 m at 15°. At the maximum 33.82 m detector-to-source
distance, the useable bandwidth will be ~ 4.5 Å.
Fig. 2.1-1. Schematic view and three-dimensional representation of HIPD
116
Table. 2.1-1. Design Parameters for HIPD

Moderator decoupled water
moderator（300 K）
Bandwidth（Δλ） 4.5 Å
Max. Beam Size 40(h)×20(w) mm2
Flux at sample position ~107 n/cm2/s
0.2 %
Best Resolution（ ∆d / d ）
Source to sample distance L1 3000 mm

Sample-detector distance L2 at 15° 3820 mm
Geometry
Sample-detector distance L2 at 90° 2000 mm
Sample-detector distance L2 at 1500 mm
150°
T0 chopper Distance from moderator 6000 mm
Bandwidth chopper 1# Distance from moderator 7000 mm
Bandwidth chopper2 # Distance from moderator 9000 mm
Moderator-to-guide distance 4000 mm
Guide1# Length 2000 mm
Cross Section 80(h)×40(w) mm2
Coating 3θc suppermirror
Length 18000 mm
Guide2# 80(h)×40(w)mm²@
Cross Section entrance
→40(h)×20(w)mm²@
exit
Guide3# Length 4000 mm
Cross Section 40(h)×20(w) mm2
Detector To Be Defined
117
2.1.2 Moderator
The ambient temperature water moderator was selected for the HIPD due to its
high flux and the good pulse shape in the desirable wavelength range, i.e. ~ 1 Å.
Fig.2.1-2 shows the neutron flux and the pulse width marked by the full width at half
maximum from the Monte Carlo simulation results. One can find the pulse width for
cold neutrons is ~ 45 μs, in agreement with the resolution demand.
1
Decoupled water moderator 50
Flux ( x 1012 n/cm2/s/A/Sr)
0.1
Pulse width FWHM ( µs)

40
30
0.01
20
1E-3
10
Flux Pulse width
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Wavelength λ (A)
Fig.2.1-2. Monte Carlo simulation results for the decoupled ambient
temperature water moderator.
2.1.3 Chopper
To reduce the background by the fast neutrons, a T0 chopper, operated in a
frequency of 25 Hz, will be installed behind of the beam port of the monolith (~ 6 m
from the moderator). Two disk choppers at 7 m and 9 m away from moderator will be
used to define the wavelength bandwidth. Normally, neutrons in 0.3 - 4.8 Å are
chosen for the experiment. The time diagram is plotted in Figure 2.1-3. If the high Q
data are needed, the choppers can be set up to use the neutron with short wavelength,
say 0.1 Å.
118
40
35
30
Flighting Path L (m) 25
20
T2
15
10 T1
5
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Time (ms)
Fig. 2.1-3. Time diagram of the disc choppers to illustrate the definition of a
0.3 - 4.8 Å bandwidth
2.1.4 Guide
The guide system is separated into three parts: 2m long in-monolith guide, 18m
long focus guide, 4m long straight guide following the focus guide.
How long target inset should be used for the HIPD? It depends strongly on the
gain of neutron flux on the sample, but also we need to balance the cost.
From the resulted gains of MC simulation, we can conclude that:
Table 2.1-2. parameters of insert guide

Beamport cross-section Suitable insert length
10 × 10 cm2 ~1-2 m
8 × 8 cm2 ~2 m
6 × 6 cm2 ~3-4 m
4 × 4 cm2 ~5 m
Therefore, we can open a relatively large beamport, in place of long target

insert guide. For the HIPD at the CSNS, we choose the insert guide of ~ 2 m with
beamport cross section of 8 x 8 cm2.
Curved guide can avoid direct beam of fast neutrons. However, due to limitation
of critical angle, curved guide may not transfer the epithermal neutrons, useful for
recording high Q data. MC simulation is done for the case with the radius of curvature
of 1000 m, which should have a better wavelength cutoff than short radius of
curvature. The transmitted neutron intensity is plotted in Figure 2.1-4 as a function of
neutron wavelength, in comparison of the case of straight guide. One can find that the
cutoff wavelength is ~ 0.5 Å, and the intensity decreases significantly for neutrons
119
with wavelength less than 2 Å.
Fig. 2.1-4. The neutron transmission efficiency for curved guide in

comparison the case of straight guide.
The HIPD is demanded to evaluate the local subtle change of atomic position for
the advanced materials (nano materials, for example) by Pair Distribution Function
(PDF) method. Therefore, neutrons with short wavelength ( ~ 0.1 Å) will be requested.
Thus we cannot use the curved guide to suppress the transmission of high energy
neutrons in place of the T0 chopper.
The HIPD is the first powder diffractometer designed for most user goals,
including of measurement on small sample and real time chemical reaction. To
increase flux on sample, the high quality focus supermirror guide may be best choice.
We simulated the neutron transmission for guide system with focus guide followed by
different length of straight guide. Simulated results are shown in Figure 2.1-5.
120
straight guide H4W2cm

15 focus guide H8 to 4cmW4 to 2cm
focus guide+ 4m straight guide
Flux (x 107 n/cm2/s)
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
λ (angstrom)
Transmission
2
focus guide
0
0 2 4 6
λ (angstrom)
Fig. 2.1-5. The neutron transmission efficiency for guide system with with
focus guide followed by different length of straight guide in comparison of the
case of non-focusing straight guide
Apparently, the focus guide enhances the neutron transmission. The neutron flux
increases by more than 50% compared with that of non-focusing straight guide.
However, the focus guide will result in inhomogenuous cross-section distribution and
increase the larger divergencelowering the resolution. So we need to add a straight
guide after the focus guide to converge and homogenize the space distribution of
neutrons transmitted. Simulated results show a 4 m long straight guide can effectively
improve the neutron performance on the sample.
121
0.4 0
Divergence at Vertical Derection(º)

3.500E4
0.2 7.000E4
1.050E5
1.400E5
0.0
1.750E5
2.100E5
-0.2
2.450E5
2.800E5
-0.4
-0.4 -0.2 0.0 0.2 0.4

Divergence at Horizontal Derection(º)
Fig. 2.1-6. The divergence of incident beam at guide exit before sample.
on
ecti
er
alD
c 2.0
rti
Ve 1.5
1.0
Neutron Counts
30000
)
0.5
cm
n(
0.0
tio
ec
-0.5
er
lD
20000 -1.0
ca
rti
-1.5
Ve
-2.0
-1.0 -0.5 0.0 0.5 1.0
Horizontal Derection(cm)
Fig. 2.1-7. The space distribution of incident beam at guide exit before sample.
The incident divergence is smaller than 0.4º and the inhomogenization of space
distribution is smaller than 0.5% after the neutron passes a 4 m long straight guide. A
longer straight guide or collimator can have a better performance, but it will result in
the decrease of neutron flux. All guides are m = 3 supermirror coated. The higher m
value benefits the transmission for short wavelength.
2.1.5 Detectors
We still adopted the bank concept, and planned 4 m2 array for high angle bank
(150°) and 90°bank, and 2 m2 for low angle bank (15°). Thus for 0.3-4.8 Å
neutrons, the d-spacing coverage can be 0.15 – 36 Å, consequently the Q-value
122
coverage 0.17–41Å-1.
Table 2.1-3 Detector and Q(d) coverage

Detector 2θ (°) Sample-detector size d（Å） Q（Å－1）
distance (m) (m2)
Bank 1 15±7.46 3.82 2 0.770～36.502 0.172～8.158
Bank 2 90±14.00 2.00 4 0.190～3.855 1.630～33.008
Bank 3 150±18.44 1.50 4 0.151～2.632 2.388～41.675
The detectors locus is drawn in Figure 2.1-8 to gives rise to a better resolution so
we can combine easily all data into a single histrogram. Those two formula give more
or less the same detector locus at high scattering angle (2θ > 90°). But
Lscatt = A + B cot θ shortens the second flight path significantly at low scattering
angle. The radius of the detector locus ranges from 1.5 m at 150°to 3.82 m at 15°.
Fig. 2.1-8. The combined ( Lscatt = A + B cot θ (blue line) for 2θ > 90° and
Lscatt = A + B cot θ (red line) for 2θ < 90°) detector locus.
2.1.6 Performance estimates

Monte Carlo simulation via the program VITESS were performed to check and
optimize the design. The guides m = 3 supply the flux (0.3-4.8 Å) of ~ 107 n/cm2/s on
the sample, ~ 20 % higher than using the guides m = 2. We simulated the shape
distribution of Bragg peaks of the polycrystal Al at three directions (2θ = 15°,
90°,150°). All peak profiles were fitted by Guassian function.
Fig.2.1-9 shows the resolution as a function of the d-spacing. The resolution
changes a little in the d-spacing range of 0.4 – 2.4 Å, where most meaningful Bragg
peaks locate. For 2θ = 150°detector, the resolution is better than 0.2% while Δd/d
is in the range of 0.38-0.63 % for 2θ = 90°detector.
123
3.0
2.5
2.0
Resolution (%)
1.5 2θ=15o, L2=3.82 m, 2.5 cm 管
2θ=90o, L2=2.0 m, 1.25 cm 管
2θ=150o, L2=1.5 m, 1.25 cm 管
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
d-spacing (Å)
Fig. 2.1-9. Resolution Δd/d resulted from the simulated peak-shape

distribution of polycrystal allumium
To estimate the time cost to collect a typical diffraction pattern, we evaluated the
whole pattern of Al polycrystal for 2θ = 150°detector (see Figure 2.1-10) with
detecting efficiency of 80%. If it is assumed that the scattering is isotropic and the
resolution difference can be ignored in the whole high angle bank, the neutron counts
for the same d-spaceing can be summed together. Therefore, almost 2 minutes will be
enough to obtain 5000 counts for the highest Bragg peak, or 1000 counts for most
medial Bragg peaks.
0.05
0.04
Neutron Counts (n/s)
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.00
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

d-spacing (A)
Fig. 2.1-10. A simulated diffractogram for the 2θ = 150°detector pixel.
124
2.2 MULTI-PURPOSE REFLECTOMETER

Tao Zhu (tzhu@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
2.2.1. Introduction
The multi-purpose reflectometer (MR) for CSNS is an instrument optimized for
examining thin films with nanometer scale structure, especially in regard to their
magnetic properties with the removable polarized neutron devices. The scattering
plane has been chosen horizontal to allow more convenient operation of the
instrument and changing optional equipments for different instrument purposes. The
detector can be moved to high scattering angle (about 160 deg), allowing diffraction
experiments complementary to reflectometry. Beside of the conventional capability to
analyze the structural and magnetic depth profiles of the thin film samples,
off-specular studies are feasible for this instrument. Furthermore, in suit studies of the
magnetic and structural properties might become reality by using an in suit UHV
deposition chamber and MOKE measuring system. Table 1 is the list of parameter
values and Figure 1 is the schematic layout of instrument.
Table 2.2-1. List of main parameter values
Moderator Coupled liquid H2 moderator (20 K)

Bandwidth（Δλ） 6Å
Guide cross-section size 40(weight)×60(height) mm2
Source to sample distance L1 19.5 m
Sample to detector distance L2 2m
Sample table 6-axis movements
Polarizer/analyzer Supermirror type
Detector 2D position-sensitive detector
Position resolution 2 mm
125
Focused guide
Moderator Bender Straight guide Sample
0.25 m
Slit Detector
Beam
Choppers
Stop
Target shielding Pre-shielding Spin Flipper
Polarizer Analyzer
0 3 6 10 17 19.5 21.5
Distance from moderator (m)
Fig. 2.2-1. Schematic layout of reflectometer.
2.2.2. Instrument design
(1) Moderator
A coupled supercritical hydrogen moderator at ~20K provides a polychromatic
beam of cold neutrons to this instrument. The coupled cold moderator was selected
for the reflectometeter because of the high intensities at long wavelengths. Pulse
widths are only moderately important for this instrument.
250
Neutron Flux (x1012n/cm2/s/A/Sr)
200
1
Pulse Width FWHM(us)
150
0.1
100
0.01 50
0
1E-3
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
λ
Fig. 2.2-2. Neutron characteristics of LH2
(2) Neutron optics optimization

The reflectometer will use a supermirror bender to eliminate the direct
line-of-sight to the moderator. After the beam exits the bender, the neutrons are
horizontally focused onto the sample by means of a focusing supermirror neutron
126
guide. The neutron guide system will be designed with the exit dimensions of the
tapered guides matching to typical thin film sample sizes (about several cm). The
guide size is optimized as 60 mm in height and 40 mm in width. The optics will
utilize evacuated and inert-gas-filled flight paths to minimize beam losses.
Table 2.2-2. The supermirror neutron guides

Guide description Parameter Value
No.
1# Shutter insert Path/Profile Rectangle
(strong
Cross-section 40 × 60 mm² (width × height)
radioresistance)
Length 2m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
2# Multi-channel Path/Profile Curvature radius: 100 m
beam bender Channel Numbers: 5
Length 5m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3.5
3# Straight guide Path/Profile Rectangle
Length 4m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
4# Focus guide Path/Profile Taper
Cross-section 40 × 60mm² @ entrance → 20 ×
30mm² @ exit
Length 4m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
The bender itself consists of double-side supermirror coated glass stacked onto
each other with separating vacuum gaps of some millimeters. They can be arranged in
a segment of a circle and guide the neutron beam through the vacuum channels.
Typical channel width will be about 10 mm. So far, the bender has been successfully
used as a device to filter the incoming neutron spectrum. It will bend only neutrons of
a certain minimum wavelength. As for CSNS-MR, the neutron beam will be bended
away from the direct beam emerging from the moderator by about 1.4°, and then the
direct line-of-sight will be lost after about 13 m. Thus, a clean neutron beam,
essentially free of fast neutron and γ radiation contributions will be delivered to the
127
sample.
The main shutter of the beamline offers 2 m space along the neutron flight path
and a neutron guide will be placed inside. The shutter begins 2 m from the moderator.
In view of the high radiation in the target station, the long-term stability of the
supermirror coatings is certainly a technical risk. So far, the shutter inside guide and
the bender have been already used at SNS. It sounds that these optics components
work very well there.
2.2.3. Instrument performance
(1) Instrument resolution

The parameter of interest for reflectometry is the normal wave-vector transfer Qz
given by
4π sin θ
Qz = 2.2-1
λ
The resolution is given approximately by
1
δ Q  δ t   δ L  2
2 2 2
2.2-2
=   +   + ( cot θδθ ) 
Q  t   L  
Hence, the resolution of this instrument is mainly decided by δθ , i.e., for large
angles of incidence the beam should be quite divergent in order to illuminate the
sample with maximum intensity (and also to be able to control the resolution over a
wide incident angle range). This is the reason that highly reflecting guide coatings
should be used.
(2) Instrument Q-range

Also the parameters of interest are the minimum and maximum values of Qz that
can be reached. These are given by
4π sin θ min/ max
QZ − min/ max = 2.2-3
λmax/ min
It can be seen that there is no significant problem in reaching a sufficient large

Q-range for the reflectometer with vertical sample geometry, since the scattering
angle and the wavelength band used in the experiment can be shifted relatively easy.
The Qz-max is limited by the highest scattering angle 2θ(≈160°) and the minimum
neutron wavelength which is transported through the neutron guides (λmin ≈1.85 Å).
These values result in above Qz-max = 5 Å-1.The value for Qz-min is not severely limited
for this instrument, because, for solid samples, one can tilt the sample surface and
access whatever Q-range is needed.
128
2.2.4. Instrument features
2.2.4.1 Bandwidth choppers
The bandwidth chopper is used to provide a fixed neutron wavelength bandwidth

Δλ. Two bandwidth choppers have been chosen in this instrument because of the low
repetition frequency of CSNS (25 Hz).
2.2.4.2 Detector and beam monitor
The detection system of MR consists of an incident beam monitor and a

position-sensitive area detector. The incident beam monitor is a low-efficiency
transmission detector which continuously measures the incident beam to provide the
integrated intensity as a function of Time of Flight. The ORDELA Model 4560N is
chosen for this instrument.
The two-dimension position-sensitive detector proposed for this instrument has a
MWPC (Multi Wire Proportional Chamber) with a sensitive area of 200×200mm2,
which filled in 5.5 atm 3He and 2.5 atm C3H8 mixtures as working gas. The detector
consists of a network of 64× 64 wires with a pixel size of 3×3 mm2.
2.2.4.3 Polarizer/analyzer
Supermirror type polarizing and analyzing elements will be used as our polarizer
and analyzer, working in transmission geometry. The transmission polarized beam
geometry will provide much more convenient for the polarizer and analyzer moving
in/out in a reflectometer without realignment of the beamline. Currently, new
supermirror cavity design can have large beam size and also work at short wavelength
(about 1.8 Å). Further study will be done for how to use such kind of supermirror
cavity in a rather high divergence of the incoming beam.
2.2.4.4 Scattering chamber
(1) Incidence table

The incidence table is located after the exit of the focusing guide. A sequence of
three computer-controlled slits will be used to define the final angular resolution used
in the experiments. For a typical sample geometry, the beam will be a few mm wide
and several cm high. Naturally, this instrument will be equipped with removable spin
polarizing/analyzing supermirror devices to achieve a polarized neutron beam.
(2) Sample table

The sample stable is provided with computer-controlled rotational and
translational motions. Total 6 axis motions will be monitored.
129
(3) Scattering table

The reflectometer detector will be placed at a distance of 21.5 m (as a typical
detector position). Due to the high precise movement of the scattering table, this
instrument will have the unique capability to perform (under the same experimental
conditions) high-angle diffraction in addition to the conventional reflectometry
experiments. Combining these two techniques in one instrument will allow one to link
structural and magnetic properties existing on the dimension of film thickness with
properties on atomic length scales.
2.2.4.5 in suit UHV thin film deposition chamber (TBD)
2.2.4.6 in suit MOKE system (TBD)
2.2.5. DAQ
The MWPC consists of two signal-wire planes and the anode-wire plane in the
center. Four signal wires are tied together, forming one readout strip. Hence, there are
100 strips in total.
Table 2.2-3. The specifications of the readout system

Description Specifications remarks
Channel 100
Dynamic range of the charge in 10-300 fc
a single channel
Rise time of the input signal ～50 ns
Bottom width of the input signal ～500 ns
Count rate of a single channel ～100 K/S
Charge resolution σQ 8 fc typical value
Charge INL 1.5%
2.2.6. Shielding
Elimination of background will be a primary concern for the reflectometer.

Significant uncertainties exist in the computation of the shielding required. The
scattering chamber of the reflectometer will be enclosed in a hutch composed of
neutron-absorbing walls (borated wax or concrete). This hutch serves to reduce
background and to isolate the equipment from the surrounding environment.
130
Dose rates along the exterior shielding shall satisfy the CSNS Radiation Policy
requirements of 2.5 mR/hr.
2.2.7. Summary
In summary, the multi-purpose reflectometer for CSNS will accentuate not only
conventional polarized/un-polarized neutron reflectivity with low background
capabilities, but also the studies of diffraction at same condition. The neutron guide
design approach presents a multi-channel beam bender as an alternative to the use of
T0 choppers for the purpose of wavelength filtering and background radiation
reduction. We should point out that in suit studies of the magnetic and structural
properties might become reality by using an in suit MOKE measuring system.
131
2.3 SMALL-ANGLE NEUTRON-SCATTERING

INSTRUMENT
Juzhou Tao (taoj@ihep.ac.cn)
2.3.1 Physical design

Among three day-one instruments of CSNS, the Small-Angle Neutron
Spectrometer (SANS) is used to probe material structures in the length scale range of
1~100 nm and has a wide scope of applications to serve the national needs in energy,
environment, biology and advanced materials R&D.
Assuming elastic scattering only, the experimental intensity signal observed of
neutron scattering off sample is expressed as
dΣ
I = ∑ ϕi ∆ Ω Vs Tmη∆ p d l， 2.3-1
dΩ
s a
i
where ϕi is source neutron flux at sample within a specific wavelength i, ∆Ω s

dΣ
source or moderator solid angle viewed by sample, neutron scattering
dΩ
cross-section per unit volume of sample, T sample transmittance , η detector
efficiency, ∆Ω d sample solid angle covered by detector. The sample neutron

scattering cross-section is decided by the sample composition and structure and
4π s i nθ
changes with the scattering wave vector q = , which is the fundamental
λ
physical quantity to be measured through elastic neutron scattering experiments.
π
Small-angle scattering occurs as q < , l being the relevant correlation length
l
in sample system. Under such condition the neutron scattering cross-section of sample
I(q) can be expressed as the following:
V p2
I (q) = N p (ρ p − ρ s ) P(q) S (q) ，
2
2.3-2
V
Where V p and N p are the volume and number of particles in sample, V the
sample volume, ρ p and ρ s the neutron scattering length density of particles and
matrix respectively, P(q ) the particle form factor, which is the square of modulus of
132
F (q ) , Fourier transform of particle shape function:
P(q ) = F (q ) ,
2
d r。
1 2.3-3
∫e
−i q r
F (q) =
Vp Vp
S (q ) is the structure factor and relates to the Fourier transform of sample
correlation function:
N
1
∑∑ e
−i (qri − r j )
S (q) = 1 + 2.3-4
N i =1 j ≠i
The essence of small-angle neutron scattering experiments is to obtain such

structure information as particle shape, size and density through measurement of
sample small-angle neutron scattering cross-section I(q). The smaller the low q limit
of measurement, the larger the correlation length scale (approximately the particle size)
probed. Current small-angle neutron spectrometers on pulsed sources work in the q
range of 10-3~1 Å-1，corresponding to 1~100nm real space measurement range. The
basic scientific goal of designing and building a small-angle neutron spectrometer is
to provide users with a beamline capable of collecting small-angle neutron scattering
data in the desired q range accurately, reliably and efficiently, plus the required
software tools to process and reduce such experiment data into a standard form of
absolute neutron scattering cross section as a function of q. After careful evaluation of
the technical performances of pulsed source small-angle neutron spectrometers in
commission or under construction in the world and taking into consideration both
scientific demands of the majority of domestic users and limited scientific as well as
engineering experience with SANS in China, the performance criterion for baseline
design are decided as the following: q range covers 0.01~0.5 Å-1 , resolution
(expressed as the variance of q over q) better than 35% at the minimal q and neutron
flux at the sample position no less than 105n/[cm2s]. The basic beamline layout of
CSNS SANS is shown in Figure 2.3-1 and instrument parameters listed in Table 2.3-1.
133
Fig. 2.3-1. Basic beamline layout of the CSNS SANS.
Table 2.3-1. Basic parameters of CSNS SANS.

Source repetition frequency 25 Hz
Moderator Coupled hydrogen（20K）
Moderator to sample distance 14 m
Moderator to upstream beam monitor distance
Moderator to downstream beam monitor
distance
Sample to detector distance 5m
Pinhole collimation
Target insert collimator
Shutter insert collimator
Distance to the moderator 2m
Entrance 8.0 cm
Exit 8.0 cm
Length 2m
Shielding insert collimator
Distance to the moderator 4m
Entrance 8.0 cm
Exit 8.0 cm
134
Length 120 cm
Sample upstream collimator
Entrance 3.50 cm
Exit 2.00 cm
Distance to the moderator 9.5 cm
Length 400 cm
Neutron chopper
T0 neutron chopper
Frequency 25 Hz
Rotor thickness 30 cm (Inconel)
Rotor distance to the axial 250 mm
Rotor distance to the moderator 5.2 m
Bandwidth limiting neutron chopper 1
Frequency 25 Hz
Beam aperture angle 112.8o
Beam center to shaft radius 300 mm
Aperture distance to moderator 6.2 m
Bandwidth limiting neutron chopper 2
Frequency 25 Hz
Beam aperture angle 167.8o
Beam center to shaft radius 300 mm
Aperture distance to moderator 9.22 m
Viewed moderator area diameter 2.5-8 cm
Beam cross section at sample position 0.6-2 cm
Direct beam penumbra diameter 2.7 cm
Detector
Effective area 50×50 cm
Resolution 1 cm (FWHM)
Distance to sample 1~5 m
Working wavelength range 0.4-8 Å
q range 0.004-3.4 Å-1
135
Neutronics simulation indicates that the time-averaged neutron flux within the
working wavelength range out of the CSNS coupled liquid hydrogen moderator is
about 3.8×1012 n/cm2s, consequently flux at the sample position 14 m from moderator
is estimated about 2.2×106 n/cm2s. Assuming the extreme case of 4 cm2 sample area
and 50% of incidence neutrons being incoherently scattered, the estimated maximum
average count rate on the detector is less than 4000 n/s. Based on the energy spectrum
of KENS coupled liquid hydrogen moderator of which the source flux at 0.2 Å is
about 10 times the average flux within 0.2-10 Å, the maximum instantaneous count
rate for detector is less than 4×104 n/s.
Fig. 2.3-2. Neutron wavelength spectrum of typical spallation source coupled

liquid hydrogen moderator.
136
Fig. 2.3-3. Point-focusing pin-hole geometry of CSNS SANS.
The CSNS SANS uses pinhole collimation, its basic optical geometry is shown
in Figure 2.3-3. For a 19 m instrument on a 25 Hz source counting only in the first
frame, the wavelength band is ~ 8.3Å. Taking into account effects of chopper
operations, the working wavelength range is chosen to be 0.4 ~ 8Å. The ideal q range
of SANS is:
  R + ∆R  
 arctan  min 
4π  L 2  
qmin = ⋅ sin 
λmax  2 
 
 
， 2.3-5
  Rmax − ∆ R  
4π  arctan  
qmax = ⋅ sin   L2 
λ2min  
 
 
where Rmin is the neutron beam penumbra radius on the detector plane under the
2 ⋅ R 2 ⋅ ( L1 + L 2 )
point-focusing condition: Rmin = , ∆ R is the detector resolution. To
L1
meet the demands of the majority of small-angle neutron scattering experiments the
CSNS SANS detector covers a q range of 0.004~0.7 Å-1. The detector could be moved
closer to sample up to 1 m, reaching a higher q limit of 3.4 Å-1 to provide wide angle
scattering capability. In such a high-q configuration the CSNS SANS measurement
range overlaps with that of the CSNS High Intensity Powder Diffractometer,
providing full q coverage between two day-one instruments.
Resolution of a small-angle neutron diffractometer can be understood as the
uncertainty in q value measurement and quantification of instrument systematic error.
It is usually expressed in terms of the ratio of q variance and q value itself:
137
2
 σQ  1  3 ⋅ R12 ⋅ L 22 3 ⋅ R 22  L 2  ∆ R 2  ∆ λ  
2 2
= ⋅ + ⋅ + + +
 Q  12  λ R 2 ⋅ L12     
1 2.3-6
   R 2  L1  R2   
The contribution of TOF uncertainty (expressed in terms of wavelength) due to

∆λ ∆τ
neutrons emitting at different times from moderator surface is = ,
λ252.7 ⋅ L⋅λ
where L is the neutron TOF distance in meter, λ is neutron wavelength in Å, and the
neutron emission time in microseconds is assumed to be a rectangular distribution.
For a short-pulse source such as CSNS its coupled hydrogen moderator is expected to
20 µ s
have a neutron pulse width of ∆τ < Å , which produces a negligible contribution
to resolution at qmin for the CSNS SANS. In figure 4 the calculated resolution at
different radial locations on the detector is plotted.
Fig. 2.3-4. the light path of the pinhole collimator of CSNS small-angle
scattering spectrometer
2.3.2 Incident neutron collimation

The basis of small-angle scattering experiment is measuring momentum change
of neutron beam scattered by sample, which implies selection and control of the
momentum of incident neutrons. CSNS small-angle neutron spectrometer realizes this
function through two types of neutronic devices: chopper which selects neutrons
within a specific wavelength range (magnitude of momentum); collimator which
controls neutron beam divergence (direction of momentum).
The role of collimator is to control the neutron beam divergence and reduce
138
background. All neutrons going through collimator without colliding with its inner
surfaces are allowed, but all other neutrons that scatter off or penetrate collimator to
reach detector contribute to background and should be shielded against as much as
possible. In an ideal collimator sample and detector are not able to receive any
neutrons scattered off the walls of collimator. Figure 2.3-5 shows a design to
implement this principle. A piece of boron carbide is placed on one end of the
collimator, the extreme beam path that evades this iris determines the location of the
second piece of boron carbide, placement of which exactly blocks that extreme path
and provides a new extreme path to determine the location of next boron carbide
piece.
Fig. 2.3-5. the optical path drawing of Small-angle neutron spectrometer

collimator
2.3.2.1 Shutter insert collimator
The design of boron carbide blocks: As shown in Figure 2.3-6, these B4C blocks
are cylindrical shaped with a tapered-cone opening. The cylinder has an outer
diameter of 140 mm and thickness of 50 mm, the tapered-cone opening is 80 mm in
diameter on the narrow side with a cone angle of 5°. Within collimators these B4C
irises provide a beam cross section smaller than spacers in between by 5mm.
Fig. 2.3-6. the design drawing of boron carbide block
139
The design of inner cavity: outer diameter 290 mm, inner diameter 90 mm,
length 2000 mm, block locations are shown in figure 2.3-7.
Fig. 2.3-7. the design drawing of the inner cavity inside the shutter
The design of outer cavity: outer diameter 490 mm, inner diameter 290 mm,
length 2000 mm.
Fig. 2.3-8. the design drawing of the outer cavity inside the shutter
The collimator assembly is shown in Figure 2.3-9.
Fig. 2.3-9. the collimator assembly inside the shutter
140
2.3.2.2 Iron Shielding Insert Collimator
The design of inner cavity: outer diameter 290 mm, inner diameter 90 mm, length
2000 mm, block locations are shown in figure 2.3-10
The design of boron carbide blocks and outer cavity is identical to that of the
Shutter Insert Collimator.
Fig.2.3- 10. the design drawing of the inner cavity outside the shutter
2.3.2.3 The design of Sample Upstream Collimator
The design of boron carbide blocks: As shown in Figure 2.3-11, Blocks are 50
mm thick cylinders with an outer diameter of 140 mm, inner opening is
tapered-cone-shaped with diameters on the narrow side decreasing from 40 mm to 20
mm, cone angle is 5°. Again, within inner cavity these B4C blocks provide a beam
cross section smaller than spacers in between by 5 mm.
Fig. 2.3-11. the design drawing of the boron carbide block of Focus collimator
The design of inner cavity: inner diameter is 290mm, outer diameter 90mm,
length 5000mm, block locations are shown in figure 2.3-12
141
Fig. 2.3-12. the design drawing of the inner cavity of the focus collimator
The design of outer cavity: inner diameter is 490mm, outer diameter 290mm,
length 5000mm
Fig. 2.3-13. the design drawing of the outer cavity of the focus collimator
The design of outer cavity: inner diameter is 490mm, outer diameter 290mm,
length 5000mm.
Fig. 2.3-14. the focus collimator assembly
142
2.3.3 Chopper Design

CSNS SANS draws experience of J-Parc/MLF instruments such as the wide
angle total scattering diffractometer NOVA and the small-angle scattering instrument
TAIKAN for its chopper design. One T0 chopper with ~30 cm Inconel neutron
attenuation block is used to stop fast neutrons and two conventional single-disk
choppers are used to select and control the working wavelength band. Detailed
designs of these choppers are to be reported by the CSNS neutron optics group.
2.3.4 Sample chamber and scattering chamber
2.3.4.1 Sample chamber
The sample chamber provides sample placement and experiment environment

space for small-angle neutron scattering experiments. It connects upstream with
collimator and downstream with scattering chamber through aluminum windows. The
sample chamber’s effective space is 1200×1800×2000 mm3. For user operation in
standing position, 2m height is reserved for the sample chamber. A side door and a
ladder from the top provide both floor and top-loading access to the sample position.
The scattering chamber provides a vacuum space for scattered neutrons to fly through
to reach detector.
(1) The design of sample exchanger
Samples are placed in sample cells. There are two interlinked cavities in the
sample exchanger, hot steam flows into one cavity to heat samples and exist out of the
other cavity. A linear motor moves sample cells to place each sample in the beam in
sequence.
Fig. 2.3-15. the design drawing of Sample exchange platform
143
The design of slits: aperture size: Φ20mm, Φ16mm, Φ12mm, Φ20mm, Φ16mm,
Φ12mm holes constituted by four small holes side by side, a 20mm
× 20mm square
hole in the middle.
Fig. 2.3-16. the design drawing of diaphragm
(2) The design of sample chamber

As shown in Figure 2.3-17, sample chamber consists of sample cavity, Sample
exchange platform, slits as well as some metal pipes.
Fig. 2.3-17. the design drawing of Sample Room
144
2.3.4.2 Scattering chamber
Scattering chamber consists of a front and a back section. A high-angle detector

bank placed in the former chamber consists of arrays formed by the 3He tubes and is
fixed in the wall; a low-angle detector placed in the tail chamber is composed by the
multi-wire proportional chamber, which can move along the rail in three dimensions.
Different diameter beamstops are in front of low-angle detectors, which are used to
block directly transmitted neutrons.
(1) The former scattering chamber design
The former scattering chamber’s inner diameter is 2 m, thickness 40 mm, length
1010 mm; there is a wall in it, which two arrays of 3He tubes are placed horizontally
in front of and two arrays vertically behind the wall. The former 3He tube’s effective
length is 500 mm, diameter 0.5 inches and the latter 3He tube’s effective length is
100mm, diameter of 0.5 inches. Four arrays of 3He tubes constitute a high-angle
detector array.
Fig. 2.3-18. the design drawing of the former scattering chamber
(2)The tail scattering chamber design

The tail scattering chamber’s inner diameter is 2 m, thickness 40 mm, length
3000 mm. Posterior wall of the former is a low-angle detector is in front of the back
wall, which is multi-wire proportional chamber detector, and can move in three
dimensions. Beamstop is in front of the low-angle detector, and its diameter changes
(Φ20mm, Φ30mm, Φ40mm), and it is used to stop the center background neutrons.
145
Fig. 2.3-19. the design drawing of the tail scattering chamber
(3) Scattering chamber assembly
Fig. 2.3-20. the design drawing of scattering chamber
(4) Sample chamber and scattering chamber assembly
146
Fig. 2.3-21. the design drawing of Sample chamber and scattering chamber
assembly
2.3.5 Neutron detector and monitor

The detection system of SANS consists of an incident beam monitor, a
transmitted-beam monitor, a small angle detector and a high angle detector (Fig.
2.3-22). The characteristics of these are described below.
Fig. 2.3-22. The sketch map of the SANS detector in the scattering chamber
147
2.3.5.1 Incident-beam monitor
The incident beam monitor is a low-efficiency transmission detector which

continuously measures the incident beam to provide the integrated intensity as a
function of Time of flight (wavelength of the neutrons). Because the beam is
transmitted through this detector, it should have high transmission factors and low
efficiency, and must produce the least perturbation of the incident beam. The
ORDELA Model 4560N is designed and manufactured by ORDELA, Inc. for the
detection and counting of thermal neutrons in intense neutron beams. It operates as a
dual-anode gas proportional counter. The detection efficiency of this counter is a
customer-specified variable that may range from 0.001% to 75%. The gamma
background sensitivity has been minimized by using an all-aluminum counter
enclosure and a quench gas of low cross-section for gamma radiation. The
proportional counter operates at low gas multiplication (<20) to extend the life of the
anode and allow operation in beam intensities of up to 108 neutrons per second per
cm2. The active volume of the counter has a 5.1 cm x 6.4 cm window area and is 1.3
cm deep. The ORDELA Model 4560N Neutron Beam Monitor is packaged in an
8.9-cm-wide, 20.3-cm-long, and 2.3-cm-high unit (Fig.2.3-23).
Fig. 2.3-23. ORDELA MODEL 4560N OUTLINE AND DIMENSIONS
2.3.5.2 Transmitted-beam monitor
A 2.5 cm diameter cylindrical 3He proportional counter containing is used as a

transmitted-beam monitor which is at a distance of 90 cm from the sample position.
On this detector, a 2.25 cm-diameter cadmium mask has been mounted to restrict the
solid angle of neutron detection to a circle centered on the direct beam. This ensures
that most of the sample small-angle scattering outside the direct-beam penumbra is
excluded from the transmission measurements. This is very important for measuring
transmission factors for very strong scatterers such as systems showing critical
phenomena. The detector is mounted on a computer-interfaced translation stage so it
can be automatically inserted into the beam when desired, and retracted for the
scattering measurements.
148
2.3.5.3 The small angle detector
A two-dimensional position sensitive neutron detector was designed for the small
angle detector. The detector was based on MWPC filled with 3He as detection
medium and C3H8 as stopping gas. The neutron absorption by a target isotope
molecule (3He) induces a fission reaction and emission of two charged particles, one
triton and one proton, in opposite direction with a total kinetic energy of 760 keV
which induces the primary ionization in gas. The stopping gas has two roles. First it
reduces the path length of the electrons for a good position resolution and minimizes
the wall effects. Secondly, in an environment of high photon background, it has a low
sensitivity to gamma and X-rays.
The ORDELA Model 2650N is a large-area, two-dimensional, position-sensitive
proportional counter (PSPC) designed and manufactured by ORDELA, Inc. The
Model 2650N PSPC uses all-metal anode and cathode wire planes for
resistance-capacitance position encoding and counting of thermal neutrons. The active
counting volume has a square area of 64×64 cm2 (Fig.2.3-24). It is 2.5 cm deep to
reduce parallax distortion. The counting gas is 3He-CF4 at 270 kPa for high neutron
detection efficiency, good spatial resolution, and low gamma-radiation cross-section.
The Model 2650N is designed for operation in a vacuum flight path. The counter is
equipped with four low-noise preamplifiers, a high-voltage distribution and filtering
circuit, and a gas purifier for extended lifetime.
149
Fig.2.3-24 The small angle detector
The location of the neutron is assumed to be the center of gravity of the induced
charges read out from the cathode strip. There are two aspects which should be
considered during the electronic design. First, the detector should own a pretty good
performance in neutron-gamma discrimination. The gamma ray can be distinguished
from neutron due to the difference of disposed energy in the gas. Second, we have to
obtain the distribution of the induced charge on the cathode strips to the get center of
gravity and then the location of the neutron. Fig.2.3-25 is the block scheme of the
electronic system based on the VME.
150
Fig. 2.3-25 block scheme of the electronic system
2.3.5.4 The high angle detector
Fig. 2.3-26. The high angle detector
The detector is composed of two arrays of 16 vertical tubes and two arrays of 16
horizontal tubes (Fig. 2.3-26). The vertical tubes had 0.5 inch external diameter and
10 cm sensitive length, and the horizontal tubes had 0.5 inch external diameter and 50
cm sensitive length. All the tubes are filled with 3He and CF4 at 20 bars, with a pixel
size of 1.5×1.5 mm2. The thin resistive anode wire is tightened in the middle of the
151
tube and relied on both sides of the amplifiers. The conversion of neutrons to
electrons follows the processes described previously. The impact position along the
tubes is now measured by charge division on the anode wire. Finally, each tube is an
independent counter able to reach 100 kHz at 10% dead time correction.
2.3.6 Data acquisition system

The readout electronic system of the CSNS SANS are in very active
development. One modular design will be implemented for both the CSNS
Multi-purpose Reflectometer (uses 20*20 MWPC) and the CSNS SANS 50*50
MWPC; another design will be adopted for both the CSNS High Intensity Powder
Diffractometer and the CSNS SANS high angle 3He LPSD array. Detailed designs
of two subsystems will be reported by the CSNS DAS team.
2.3.7 Data reduction and analysis

The CSNS SANS data reduction process extracts normalized and calibrated
sample scattering intensity data out of raw experiment datasets output by the DAS.
Standard cadium mask will be used to calibrated efficiencies of different detector
pixels; a set of transimission mode experiment data, including sample plus cell,
sample cell iteself and cadium attenuated data, will be used to measure the sample
transmission. Combining these two results with experiment scattering data gives
absolutely scaled sample scattering cross section as a function of q. Preliminary
design of the data reduction process is illustrated in the following diagram:
1 runfile
detector pixel from sample transmission
Sensitivity from 4
flood-pattern runfile
2 from sample scattering
efficiency ratio of
0 Detector to monitor
runfile runfile
from cadmium mask from cadmium transmission
runfile
from cadmium scattering
5
Normalized
Scattering intensity runfile
3 from background transmission
transmission
coefficients runfile
from background scattering
0：cadium mask calibration data

1：detector flood-pattern data
2：calculation of relative detector efficiency
3：calculation of sample transmission
4：experiment dataset
5：normalized scattering intensity
Fig. 2.3-27. preliminary design of the data reduction process
152
2.3.8 Shielding (TBD)
2.3.9 Testing, Assembly and Installation (TBD)
2.3.10 Interfaces to the other systems (TBD)
153
2.4 SAMPLE ENVIRONMENTS

Shaoying Zhang (syzhang@aphy.iphy.ac.cn)
2.4.1 Introduction
Sample environment (SE) equipment, including of cryostats, furnaces, pressure
cells and cryomagnets etc., are an essential adjunct to neutron scattering instruments.
The experiment conditions of low and high temperature, high pressure and magnetic
field can be loaded from SE equipment to the samples being studied into a phase or
state of particular interest. SE equipment has the exceptional advantages on
application of neutron experiments due to strong penetrability.
Based on the user invesitgation by annual user meetings from 2004, operation
experiences of overseas neutron scattering centers and the present situation of CSNS
budget, we plan to provide SE equipment with relatively low investment and high use
frequency. The main performances of SE equipment considered currently are listed in
Table 2.4-1.
Table 2.4-1. Proposed SE equipments

SE equipment Performances
Closed cycle refrigerator/cryostat 4.2/10～300 K
Liquid helium cryostat (Orange cryostat) 1.5～300 K
Furnace 25～1800 °C
Vertical field electro-magnet 0 ~2 T
Vertical field super-conducting cryomagnet 0～15 T, 2～300 K
High presure cell 0～10 GPa, 90～300 K
Most common SE equipment has been commercially available because the

neutron scattering techniques have been well-developed in some developed countries.
We plan to order most SE equipment from abroad manufacturers, and to consign
processing some with in-house design.
2.4.2 Cryogenic equipment

The cryogenic environments are very important for neutron scattering
applications on multi-discipline research workes. The largest proportions of neutron
scattering experiments or measurements by far are performed under cryogenic
conditions, according to ISIS statistics for many years. The thermal motions of the
atoms, vibrations, rotations etc. are reduced, but also that phase transitions of
particular interest may be initiated and explored under cryogenic conditions. At the
154
first stage, we plan to supply a helium closed cycle refrigerator (4.2/10~300 K) and a
liquid helium cryostat (1.5~300 K).
2.4.2.1 Closed cycle refrigerator
Close cycle refrigerators (CCRs) mostly use the Gifford-McMahon refrigeration

cycle in neutron scattering laboratories abroad. Fig. 2.4-1 shows the scheme of
Gifford-McMahon refrigeration cycle. Helium gas is the refrigerant of CCRs. The gas
compressor (operating near room temperature) and the cryogenic expansion cylinder
(cold head) are thermally linked by a regenerator or thermal storage device. Although
there are the different types of systems, the CCRs are mainly made up by the items of
the sample block, heat shield cans, temperature controller, sensor, heater cables and
vacuum can.
Fig. 2.4-1. Scheme of Gifford-McMahon refrigeration cycle
The CCR-based cryostat systems are either “directcooling”, in which the sample
is attached directly to the cold-head, or “indirect cooling”, more often called
“cryogen-free”, in which the sample is held in a helium exchange-gas chamber which
is cooled by the second-stage of the cold-head. In both configurations the CCR’s first
stage is used to cool an intermediate temperature heat shield. On some CCRs the first
stage heat shield may achieve temperatures as low as 40 K. While direct cooling
provides a very rapid sample cooling, of the order 40 minutes, it has the disadvantage
that sample changing requires that the entire CCR unit is removed from the instrument
vacuum chamber with the probability of air and water condensing on both cold head
and sample. Cryogen-free CCR cryostats are in use at most major neutron centers
because these systems have the advantage that samples being physically isolated from
the CCR can be changed without stopping and warming up the CCR. Furthermore,
155
coldest stage of the CCR is mechanically and thermally attached to the sample volume
at a point a few centimeters above the sample position. This point then functions both
as the heat exchanger, cooling the helium exchange gas and sample, and also as
temperature monitoring and control. So the cryogen-free CCR is more fit for the
samples with low heat conductivity and multiple shape. Fig. 2.4-2 shows schematic
diagram of the cryogen-free CCR configuration.
Fig. 2.4-2. Schematic diagram of the cryogen-free CCR configuration
The CS204A-x19n type cryogen-free CCR (10~350 K）shown in Figs. 2.4-3 and
2.4-4, developed by Advanced Research System, USA, and SHI-950T-4 type
top-loading cryofurnace (4.2~800 K）shown in Figs. 2.4-5 and 2.4-6, manufactured by
JANIS Research Company, USA, are choosen for the first-phase instruments.
(1)CS204A-x19n-type CCR (10~350 K）
156
Fig. 2.4-3. Schematic diagram of the cryogen-free CCR designed by

Advanced Research System, USA (unit: inch)
Fig. 2.4-4. CS204A-x19n-type CCR
157
The primary parameters:

Temperature range:10～350 K
The lowest temperature: < 9 K
The highest temperature: 355 K
Sample chamber inner-diameter: 50 mm
Cooldown time to 20 K: 30 min
Cooling power at 10 K: 2.0 W
Cooling power at 20 K: 9.0 W
Wall thickness of tail screen at neutron zone: 1 mm (Al)
Thermometry sensor: SiD
Temperature controller: LakeShore 332
Cold head: DE-204AF
Compressor: ARS-4HW
System weight: Cryo-cooler: 7.5 kg, Compressor: 73 kg
(2)SHI-950T-4-type CCR (4.2~800 K）
Fig. 3.2.5-5. Schematic diagram of top-loading dryofurnace designed by

JANIS, USA (unit: inch)
158
Fig. 3.2.5-6. SHI-950T-4-type top-loading cryofurnace

Temperature range: 4.2～800 K
The lowest temperature: 4 K
The highest temperature: 800 K
Low temperature mode: exchange gas (heater on sample well)
High temperature mode: vacuum (heater on sample stick)
Cooling power at 4.2 K: 1.0 W
Wall thickness of tail screen at neutron zone: 1 mm (Al)
2.4.2.2 Liquid helium cryostats (Orange cryostats)
Liquid helium cryostat (a popular name “Orange cryostat”), designed by

Brochier at the ILL in 1975, has now been adopted by many neutron scattering centres
world wide, which is now regarded as the international standard with variations built
which differ either in sample access diameter, tail geometry or even having
superconducting coils incorporated. The system includes mainly the items of the inner
vacuum chamber, liquid helium and liquid nitrogen boths. The sample is suspended in
low pressure, ~10 mbar, helium exchange gas inside the inner vacuum chamber, and
liquid helium exhausts through a heat exchanger integral with the inner vacuum
chamber. The exhausting cold helium gas passes through annular space around the
inner vacuum chamber so cooling it along its entire length. Fig. 2.4-7 shows the
schematic diagram of typical Orange cryostat.
159
Fig. 2.4-7. Schematic diagram of typical Orange cryostat
Orange cryostat（1.5～300 K）shown in Figs. 2.4-8 and 2.4-9, manufactured by

AS Scientific Products Ltd., UK, is choosen for the first-phase instruments.
Fig. 2.4-8. Standard tail (125mm) of Orange Cryostat, AS Scientific

Products Ltd., UK (unit: mm)
160
Fig. 2.4-9. 50 mm Orange cryostat, AS Scientific Products Ltd., UK

Temperature range: 1.5～300 K
LN2-hold time: 3~4 days
LHe-hold time: 24~36 hrs
Wall thickness of tail screen at neutron zone: <1.2 mm (Al)
Thermometry sensor: SiD
2.4.3 High temperature furnaces

The high temperature envirnments are also essential to stduy the structure or
phase transitions and dynamic behaviors of condensed matters. Unlike the case of the
cryostat equipment there has been no standardisation of high temperature furnace
designs. The typical furnace configuration is a cylindrical metal foil heating element,
surrounded by three or more concentric heat shields. The sample is inserted into the
center of this assembly. Fig. 2.4-10 shows the schematic diagram of metal foil high
temperature furnace. The choice of heating element material, usually V, Nb, Ta, Mo or
W, is primarily determined by the working temperature range but also by whether the
experiment is elastic or inelastic scattering. Although vanadium has many desirable
neutron properties for diffraction experiments, its tendency to undergo a brittle
recrystalliization at ~900℃ restricts its long -term upper working temperature to
~1100℃.A bove this tem perature,and particularly for inelastic scattering experim ents,
the next best choice is niobium which may be used up to ℃. 1800For higher
temperatures the preferred option is usually Ta, Mo or W.
161
Fig. 2.4-10. Schematic diagram of metal foil high temperature furnace
The metal foil high temperature furnace up to 1800°C shown in Figs. 2.4-11 and
2.4-12, manufactured by AS Scientific Products Ltd., is choosen for the first-phase
instruments.
Fig. 2.4-11. Metal foil high temperature furnace developed by AS Scientific

Products Ltd., UK（unit：mm）
162
Fig. 2.4-12. Furnace system of AS Scientific Products Ltd., UK

Temperature range: 25～1800ºC
Sample chamber diameter: 50 mm
Heating power(max)：3 kVA
Neutron beam window, heat shields and heater material: Nb
2.4.4 Magneic field equipment

For common request of low magnetic fields, the electro-magnet up to 2 T shown
in Fig. 2.4-13, manufactured by GMW Company, USA, is choosen.
Fig. 2.4-13. 45 mm Dipole 3470-type electro-magnet, GMW company, USA
163

Magnetic field (max): 2 T
Pole diameter: 45 mm
Pole Gap: 0~75 mm
Coil resistance(20°C): 7.3 Ω
Coil resistance(max): 8.8 Ω
Weight: 27 kg
Many scientific cases, such as quantum phase transitions, spin Hall effect,
magnetism of thin films and interfaces, magnetic phase diagrams and magnetic
structures of condensed matters, and the fundaments of high temperature
superconductivity need to be explored by neutron magnetic scattering under high
magnetic fields and cryogenic conditions.
For the request of higher magnetic fields, the super-conducting cryomagnet is
needed. The vertical field cryomagnet manufactured by Oxford Instruments, UK, can
provide high magnetic field up to 15 T（2～300 K）. The schematic diagram of earlier
vertical field cryomagnet is shown in Fig. 2.4-14. The new one developed last year,
with a special design, can significantly reduced helium consumption, which is shown
in Fig. 2.4-15.
Fig. 2.4-14. Schematic diagram of earlier vertical field cryomagnet, Oxford

Instruments, UK
164
Fig. 2.4-15. NM15T new type superconducting cryomagnet system (helium

recondensing) , Oxford Instruments, UK

Temperature range: 2~300 K
Magnetic field (max): 15 T (2.2 K), 13.5 T (4.2 K)
Magnetic field direction: perpendicular to split
Split: 20 mm
Split angle: +/- 15°
Horizontal access: total view 330° (30° dead angle)
Sample diameter: < 18 mm
2.4.5 High pressure cells

Pressure is a very powerful variable, since it can be applied over more than
four-decades, to directly induce both structural and magnetic phase transitions. For
neutron scattering experiments, the high pressure techniques and cells can be divided
into 3 main types: high-pressure gas, piston-in-cylinder and opposed-anvil clamped
cells. The opposed-anvil clamped cells can provide highest pressure. The
Paris–Edinburgh (PE) cell, a typical opposed-anvil clamped cell, is widely used for
neutron scattering investigations, which permits in situ pressure changes and
additionally can be used for powders, single crystals and simple fluids. The PE cell
achieves high pressures by compressing a sample within a gasket between two
opposed anvils (shown in Fig. 2.4-16). The anvils are commonly sintered diamond,
165
sapphire, WC or most recently synthetic moissanite, (hexagonal silicon carbide). Fig.

2.4-17 is the PE cell manufactured by MG63 Company, France, which can provide 10
GPa for the sample with volumes of ~100 mm3. In conjunction with a specially built
nitrogen cryostat, the PE cell working envelope can be cooled down to ~100 K.
Fig. 2.4-16. Schematic diagram of Paris-Edinburgh Cell ((a) anvils and steel
binding ring; (b) backing seats; (s) sample chamber; (g) gasket made of
zero-scattering TiZr alloy)
166
Fig. 2.4-17. PE cell manufactured by MG63 Company, France

Temperature range: 90~300 K
Azimuthal angle: 60 º
Equatorial angle: 140 º
Mass: 60 kg
Capacity: 200 t
2.4.6 Interface to other systems
(1) Interface to sample table of instruments

The sample table of every instrument with the same diameter of 800 mm, is
three-dimensional adjustable. The outer diameters of all systems of SE equipment
mentioned above are smaller than 800 mm, which ensures that SE equipment can
install on the sample table.
(2) Interface to control system of instruments
The automation, remote controlling and monitoring of cryogenic systems, high
temperature furnaces, high pressure generators, magnetic fields, sample position and
orientation will be considered and fited to the generic control mode of CSNS whole
project.
(3) Interface to utilities of instruments
The supplies of cycled cooling water, electronic cables and compressed gases
required by all systems of SE equipment will be considered by utilities of instruments.
167
2.5 NEUTRON OPTICS

Ping Wang (wangping@ihep.ac.cn)
2.5.1 Neutron guide

Since the design baseline of the neutron guide is to select international vendors to
provide the various neutron guides designed by instrument scientists, the future main
activities for the neutron guide staffs are the follows:
1. Physically design of various neutron guides, especially some kinds of
advanced neutron guides.
2. Provide neutron guide technical support to the instrument scientist for
instrument neutron optics design.
3. Investigate neutron guide products and negotiate with international vendors.
4. Be responsible for the performance of the imported neutron guides meeting
with the requirements of the instrument scientist.
Three neutron scattering instruments are constructed, i.e. HIPD, MR, and
SANS in CSNS-I, and there are no guides in present SANS instrument design. The
following tables give the neutron guide specifications of HIPD and MR instrument.
High Intensity Powder Diffraction Spectrometer (HIPD):
Table 2.5-1. parameters of HIPD neutron guide

Guide No. description Parameter value
Inner Type Supermirror straight guide
insert in
Path/Profile Rectangle
Target
1#
Station Cross-section 40 × 80mm² (width × height)
Length 2m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Additional information: The guide must have
more strong radioresistance
Straight Type Supermirror straight guide
guide
2#
Cross-section 40 × 80mm² (width × height)
Length 3m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Focus Type Supermirror focus guide
168
guide Path/Profile Taper (vertical focus)

3#
Cross-section 40 × 80mm²@ entrance→ 40
× 40mm²@ exit
Length 20m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Multi-function Reflectometer (MR):

Table 2.5-2. parameters of MR neutron guide
Guide No. description Parameter value
Shutter insert Type Supermirror straight guide
neutron guide
in Target
1#
Station Cross-section 60 × 40mm² (width × height)
Length 2m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Additional information: The guide must have
more strong radioresistance
Multi-channel Type Supermirror bender guide
beam bender
Path/Profile Curved (polygonal approx.)
2#
Channel Channel Number: 5
Curvature radius: 100m
Thickness of parting slip:0.5mm
Length 4m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3.5
Straight guide Type Supermirror straight guide
3#
Length 4m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Focus guide Type Supermirror focus guide
169
Path/Profile Taper (hor.&vert focus)

4#
Cross-section 60 × 40mm²@ entrance → 30 ×
20mm²@ exit
Length 4m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
Polarizing Type Polarizing neutron guide
guide
5#
Length 2m
Coating Ni/Ti, m=3
2.5.2 Neutron chopper
In the spallation neutron sources, the neutron chopper is inserted in the flight
path of the neuron beam, and it includes a rotating mass which is used to
mechanically block the neutron beam to select the desired wavelength neutrons. The
rotating mass should have the ability to absorb the unnecessary neutrons, and the
angular positioning of the rotating mass must be phase-locked with the neutron timing.
Three different functional types of neutron choppers are usually used, which are T0
chopper, bandwidth-limiting chopper and Fermi chopper.
The neutron chopper staff team of CSNS is organized on Aug. 2007, which
includes three persons(P. Wang, Y.F Ke, F.W Wang,). In the past two and a half years,
the major activities of chopper team include two aspects, one is physical design of
bandwidth limiting chopper and T0 chopper, the other is research and development of
prototype machine of bandwidth limiting chopper.
2.5.2.2 Physical Design of Bandwidth Limiting Chopper
The bandwidth limiting (BWL) neutron chopper provides a fixed neutron

wavelength bandwidth Δλ, and it includes a chopping disk, a narrow flange style
vacuum chamber, a servo motor and a servo driver etc. The chopping disk has a sector
opening angle, which defines a time frame to let the desired wavelength neutrons pass
through, while the other neutrons are almost absorbed by the coating of B4C or Gd2O3
on the surface of the disk. Fig.2.5-1 gives the schematic of the chopping disk, and
fig.2.5-2 gives the schematic of the BWL chopper system.
170
Neutron Beam Window
Vacuum Flange Servo Motor
Aluminium disk
Supporting leg
B4C coating Ground Plate
Fig.2.5-1. Chopping disk Fig.2.5-2. BWL chopper system
(1) The radius of chopping disk

The radius of chopping disk is decided by the distance R from the disk center to
the neutron guide center, which is determined by the width of the neutron guide(or the
beam width at the entrance of chopper). As the opening of the disk partially covers the
neutron beam at the entrance and exit of the opening time, there are the increase and
decrease regions in the neutron transmission curve of BWL chopper. Fig.2.5-3 gives
the neutron transmission rate during one pulsed period T, angle θ is the opening angle
of the disk, angle α is the central angle of neuron guide width d to the center of the
disk(α≈2Arctan(d/2R)), ω is angular velocity of the rotation. The ratio η of loss
transmission time to the total passthrough time is 2α/(θ+α), when the neuron guide
width d and the neutron wavelength bandwidth Δλ are fixed, to reduce the value of η,
angle θ could be more larger, or radius R could be more larger. While more larger
angle θ and fixed bandwidth Δλ will make the chopper more further from the
moderator, and more larger radius R will cause more bigger moment of inertia, which
will give more load to the servo motor. For example, θ=90˚, d=0.04m, when the R
increases from 0.25m to 0.3m, the η decreases from 18.5% to 15.6%, the reference
value of radius R is 0.3m.
100％
(θ-α)/ω
0 α/ω α/ω
T t
Fig. 2.5-3. Neutron transmission rate during one pulsed period T
171
(2) The second chopper location

There are usually two or more BWL choppers in a TOF neutron scattering
spectrometer, the first BWL chopper determines the maximum usable bandwidth, and
the other BWL choppers is used to eliminate long wavelength background through the
first chopper, which are also called the frame overlap choppers.
The symbols of first and second chopper are called T1 and T2 individually, and
L1 and L2 are the distances of the first and second chopper to the moderator each other.
The desired wavelength range is λ0~λ0+Δλ.
The several wavelength ranges of neutrons that can pass through the first
chopper can be written as follows: h·n·T/(m·L1)+λ0~ h·n·T/(m·L1) +λ0+Δλ, h is the
planck constant, m is the mass of neutron, and n is 0 or positive integer. The interval
of wavelength ranges is h·T/(m·L1), which is inverse proportional to the first chopper
location L1. To let the neutron wavelength of leakage be more longer, the first chopper
should be more nearer to the moderator(which often be limited by the outer shielding
radius of the target station).
To entirely eliminate the n-th frame overlap background, the second chopper
location L2 should fill the following requirement:
k +1 k
> L2 > 2.5-1
n m ⋅ ∆λ n m ⋅ ∆λ
+ −
L1 h ⋅ T L1 h ⋅ T
k is not less than n(k=n,n+1,n+2…). As the neutron flux is exponential
attenuation with the neutron wavelength’s increase, it is usually feasible to only
eliminate the first frame overlap background, the common reference value of n and k
is n=1, k=1.
Considering the leakage of neutrons due to the initial neutron pulse time
delay(typically 10~100μs), Δtx is the pulse delay time of λx wavelength neutrons, Δt1 is
the opening time of T1, the minimum Δtx of the leakage of neutrons could be
calculated as follows:
n ⋅ T − ∆t1 − k ⋅ T
∆tx min = k ⋅ T + 2.5-2
L1
1−
L2
The value of L2 is dependent to k. As the neutron flux is exponential attenuation
with the initial neutron pulse delay time, to reduce the background of the leakage of
neutrons, the value of L2 should be larger to let the value of Δtxmin more larger.
(3) Chopper parameters in the first three neutron scattering spectrometers
The choice of two choppers for most CSNS neutron scattering spectrometers is
mainly because the repetition frequency of CSNS is lower than other spallation
neutron sources, as a result, the frame width interval of passing the first chopper is
more wider and only the second frame of leakage is needed to be eliminated by
reasonably configuring the location of the second chopper.
Table 2.5-3 gives the common parameters of BWL choppers in the first three
neutron scattering spectrometers in CSNS-I.
172
Table 2.5-3. Common parameters of the BWL chopper

Radius R to the beam center 300mm
Rotating speed 1500 RPM (25Hz)
Length of blocking neutrons 6mm
Disk material Aluminium alloy
Neutron absorbing material B4C
Transmission rate of 1 Å neutrons 10-4
Phase control precision ±24μs
Neutron beam window material Aluminium alloy
Thickness of neutron beam window 0.4mm
Vacuum degree 1Pa
Dynamic balance standards ISO 1940/1 G1.0
2.5.2.3 Research and Development of Prototype Machine of
Bandwidth Limiting Chopper
(1) Mechanical design

The 3D CAD design of the prototype machine of bandwidth limiting chopper by
Solidworks software is seen in fig.2.5-2, and fig.2.5-4 shows the photograph of the
prototype machine. The dimension is 419mm long, 794mm high, and 720mm wide.
As the chopper runs in the environment of strong neutron and γ-ray’s radiation, and
aluminum generates short-life nuclear element, while stainless steel generates
long-life nuclear element, so the machine’s material is super duralumin(yield strength:
505MPa) instead of stainless steel. The weight of the machine is 122kg.
Fig. 2.5-4. Photograph of the prototype machine
The cross-section of neutron beam window flange is 120mm wide and 140mm
high, designed for 80mm wide and 100mm high neutron beam.
173
The spinning disk is effected by centrifugal force, which will generate stress and
may distort the disk. The mechanical design of the disk is optimized by the finite
element software COSMOSWorks, which is integrated into the Solidworks CAD
software. The thickness of the disk is 4mm(most area), 20mm(center), 11.32mm(up),
and the center of mass is coincident with the rotating axis. When the rotating
frequency is 25Hz, the maximal stress is 7.87MPa. The security coefficient is
64(505/7.87≈64), which is sufficient for the requirement of mechanical strength.
Fig. 2.5-5. The disk’s stress distribution
The dynamic balance standard follows the international standard of ISO 1940/1,
and the principle and testing methods of rotor dynamic balance are investigated and
the dynamic balance testing of the prototype machine is under way.
(2) Machining of neutron absorbed disk
The neutron absorbing material is selected as carbonized boron(B4C), as the
neutron absorption cross section of 10B atom in carbonized boron is 3820
barn(neutron energy: 0.0253eV). The neutron absorbability of carbonized boron is
decided by the amount of B10 atoms per sq.cm2, which is also the mass density of
carbonized boron per sq.cm2. Calculations indicates that to get the transmission rate
10-4,10-5,10-6 for 1 Å neutrons, the corresponding mass density of carbonized boron
per sq.cm2 are 0.4977 g/cm2, 0.6216 g/cm2, 0.7476 g/cm2. When the density of
carbonized boron is 2.52g/cm3, the thickness of the coating is about 2mm for
transmission rate 10-4.
The difficulty of machining the neutron absorbed disk is how to adhere tightly
the carbonized boron coating on the surface of aluminium alloy. As the disk often
rotate for a long time(4000 hours per year) with high speed(25Hz), the adhere force of
the coating should be sufficient for relatively high stability and reliability. Several
continuous test running with double speed(50Hz) is necessary to prove feasible.
The work of adherence of coating is under way, high combine strength
structural epoxy resin is mixed with the B4C micro powder, and test running of the
disk will be done in the middle of this year.
(3) Phase control
The selection and purchase of magnetic bearing motor and mechanical bearing
motor are investigated, for 25Hz BWL chopper, mechanical bearing motor is
sufficient for acceptable use life(more than 5 years) and cheap cost. The motor is
brushless vacuum servo motor(model: VS-R63), which is purchased from the empire
174
magnetics inc. and can work on 10-5 Pa vacuum environment. The rotation position
feedback component is resolver, which can work on strong radiation conditions.
The phase control of the chopper to the neutron timing was realized on the
chopper mock-up machine platform in 2008. The TDC signal is substituted by Z
signal from the encoder, and the timing signal is generated from the waveform
generator. The motion control arithmetic and real-time phase control software by
Visual C++ programming were developed to change the rotating speed to synchronize
the Z signal with the timing signal, the primary rough phase error is ± 25μs, which is
shown from the Oscilloscope.
Fig. 2.5-6. Block diagram of chopper mock-up machine phase control system
The work of phase control of the prototype machine is under way, the previous
phase control design is based on the motion control programming with the
IEC61131-3 PLC language in the Compax3 T40 servo drive. As it is discussed with
the SNS and ISIS chopper colleagues that high precision phase synchronization
function is integrated in bosch rexroth indradrive servo driver, which can be used to
realize the phase control of the neutron chopper, fig.2.5-7 shows the phase control
block diagram. The next step is to investigate the interface of neutron chopper and
neutron timing, and design the detailed neutron chopper control system. The phase
control function of the prototype machine is anticipated to run in the end of 2010.
Fig.2.5-7. Block diagram of the chopper prototype machine phase control system
175
2.5.2.4 Summary
In the past two and a half years, much works have been done on the physical
design and R&D of the neutron chopper. Because the lack of related experiences on
neutron chopper and limited manpower, there are some difficulties and some tortuous
course are taken. It is necessary to strength the relation and intercourse with the
international experienced neutron chopper experts to get advices for some challenging
problems. In the following years, according to the CPM of CSNS, the work of neutron
chopper is under way and will carry on step by step.
2.5.2.5 Open questions

1. What is the effective way to adhere relatively thick B4C on the high speed
rotating disk?
2. Would you please provide the detailed neutron chopper control system
schematic for reference? It may involve the phase control, status monitor, the interface
with the timing system and upper EPCIS control system.
176
2.6 NEUTRON DETECTION

Zhijia Sun (sunzj@ihep.ac.cn)
The CSNS is scheduled to begin operation in September, 2016. Three neutron

scattering instruments have been approved. Instrument requirements for detector
systems are shown in Table 2.6-1 and the detector selections for these instruments are
shown in Table 2.6-2.
Table 2.6-1. Instrument requirements

Instrument Active area Pixel area Neutron Time
(cm2) capture resolution
efficiency(%) (μs)
HIPD 4m2 1.5×1.5 60%@2Å 2
2
2m 2.5×1.5 60%@2Å 2
MR 20cm×20cm 0.3×0.3 50%@2Å 2
SANS 50cm×50cm 1.0×1.0 50%@2Å 2
+50cm×50cm 1.5×1.5 60%@2Å 2
Table 2.6-2 Detector Selections

Instrument Detector selection
3
HIPD He filled 100 cm×2.5 cm Linear position sensitive detectors
3
He filled 100 cm×1.3 cm Linear position sensitive detectors
MR Multiwire proportional chamber
SANS Multiwire proportional chamber
3
He filled Linear position sensitive detectors
2.6.1 Detectors for the MR

The detection system of MRS consists of an incident beam monitor and a
position-sensitive area detector (Fig. 2.2-1). The characteristics of these are described
below.
177

8.9-cm-wide, 20.3-cm-long, and 2.3-cm-high unit (Fig. 2.6-1).
Fig. 2.6-1. Ordela model 4560N
2.6.1.2 Position-sensitive area detector
The neutron detector plays an essential important role in the construction of the
spectrometer. A two-dimensional position sensitive neutron detector was designed for
the MR. The detector was based on MWPC filled with 3He as detection medium and
C3H8 as stopping gas. The neutron absorption by a target isotope molecule (3He)
induces a fission reaction and emission of two charged particles, one triton and one
proton, in opposite direction with a total kinetic energy of 760 keV which induces the
primary ionization in gas. The stopping gas has two roles. First it reduces the path
length of the electrons for a good position resolution and minimizes the wall effects.
Secondly, in an environment of high photon background, it has a low sensitivity to
gamma and X-rays.
The detector under construction has a sensitive area of 200×200 mm2, filled with
5.5 atm 3He + 2.5 atm C3H8 mixtures as working gas. The detector was composed by
a network of 64× 64 wires with a pixel size of 3×3 mm2. The advantages of gas-filled
detectors are their high efficiency for thermal neutrons, around 50% at a wavelength
178
of 2Å and a low sensitivity to γ radiation.
Fig. 2.6-2. The high pressure container
As will be working under high pressure, all the wire planes are fixed in a high
pressure container. The anode signals and the cathode signals are connected to the
readout electronics via flanges. A gas purified system is also included, so as to
guarantee the purity of the working gas. Fig. 2.6-2 is the construction of the detector.
gravity and then the location of the neutron. Fig. 2.6-3 is the block scheme of the
179
Fig. 2.6-3. block scheme of the electronic system
2.6.1.3 The prototype of MWPC
A prototype of a two-dimensional MWPC has already been constructed prior to

the neutron detector. Tested by 55Fe 5.9keV X-ray in 1atm Ar/CO2 (90/10) mixture, an
energy resolution (FWHM) for 55Fe 5.9keV X-ray of about 23%, and the spatial
resolution (FWHM) of about 378.8μm along the anode wire direction were obtained
(Fig. 2.6-4. The successful construction of the prototype lays the foundation for the
neutron detector construction.
(a) Energy spectrum for the 55Fe 5.9keV X-ray; (b) Spatial resolution along the anode wire direction
55
Fig. 2.6-4. The prototype of MWPC tested by Fe 5.9keV X-ray
The software, including the data acquisition and data processing, are developed
based on the C++ and LabVIEW. The raw data read from the VME unit is stored in
the local memory. The energy spectrum, which can tell us the neutron from the
gamma ray, and the position information, which can show us the induced charge
distribution and the scatter diagram, can be got from the data processing software. Fig.
2.6-5 is the interface of the software.
180
Fig. 2.6-5 The interface of the software Fig. 2.6-6The neutron energy spectrum
At last, preliminary tested by the Am-Be neutron source, the detector showed a
good performance in neutron-gamma discrimination. An energy spectrum (Fig. 2.6-6)
was observed after a few hours radiation exposure. The peak on the right side
corresponds to the energy disposed by neutron, while the left one corresponds to the
gamma ray. So with appropriate threshold selected, the gamma ray can be
distinguished from the neutron easily.
2.6.2 Detectors for the SANS

The detection system of SANS consists of an incident beam monitor, a
transmitted-beam monitor, a small angle detector and a high angle detector (Fig.
2.3-22). The characteristics of these are described below.

181
2.6.2.2 Transmitted-beam monitor
A 2.5 cm diameter cylindrical gas proportional counter containing 3He as the

neutron absorber is used as a transmitted-beam monitor that is at a distance of 90cm
from the sample position. On this detector, a 2.25 cm-diameter cadmium mask has
been mounted to restrict the solid angle of neutron detection to a circle centered on the
direct beam. This ensures that most of the sample small-angle scattering outside the
direct-beam penumbra is excluded from the transmission measurements. This is very
important for measuring transmission factors for very strong scatterers such as
systems showing critical phenomena. The detector is mounted on a
computer-interfaced translation stage so it can be automatically inserted into the beam
when desired, and retracted for the scattering measurements.
2.6.2.3 The small angle detector
A two-dimensional position sensitive neutron detector was designed for the small
angle detector. The detector was based on MWPC filled with 3He as detection
medium and C3H8 as stopping gas. The neutron absorption by a target isotope
molecule (3He) induces a fission reaction and emission of two charged particles, one
triton and one proton, in opposite direction with a total kinetic energy of 760 keV
which induces the primary ionization in gas. The stopping gas has two roles. First it
reduces the path length of the electrons for a good position resolution and minimizes
the wall effects. Secondly, in an environment of high photon background, it has a low
sensitivity to gamma and X-rays.
The ORDELA Model 2650N is a large-area, two-dimensional, position-sensitive
proportional counter (PSPC) designed and manufactured by ORDELA, Inc. The
Model 2650N PSPC uses all-metal anode and cathode wire planes for
resistance-capacitance position encoding and counting of thermal neutrons. The active
counting volume has a square area of 64×64 cm2 (Fig. 2.3-24). It is 2.5 cm deep to
reduce parallax distortion. The counting gas is 3He-CF4 at 270 kPa for high neutron
182
detection efficiency, good spatial resolution, and low gamma-radiation cross-section.

The Model 2650N is designed for operation in a vacuum flight path. The counter is
equipped with four low-noise preamplifiers, a high-voltage distribution, a filtering
circuit and a gas purifier for extended lifetime.
gravity and then the location of the neutron. Fig. 2.6-8 is the block scheme of the
Fig. 2.6-8. block scheme of the electronic system
2.6.2.4 The high angle detector
The detector is composed of two arrays of 16 vertical tubes and two arrays of 16
horizontal tubes (Fig. 2.6 -9). The vertical tubes had 0.5 inch external diameter and 10
cm sensitive length, and the horizontal tubes had 0.5 inch external diameter and 50 cm
sensitive length. All the tubes are filled with 3He and CF4 at 20 bars, with a pixel size
of 1.5×1.5 mm2. The thin resistive anode wire is tightened in the middle of the tube
and relied on both sides of the amplifiers. The conversion of neutrons to electrons
follows the processes described previously. The impact position along the tubes is
183
now measured by charge division on the anode wire. Finally, each tube is an
independent counter able to reach 100 kHz at 10% dead time correction.
Fig. 2.6-9. The high angle detector
2.6.3 The detectors for the HIPD

The detection system of HIPD consists of an incident beam monitor and a
position-sensitive area detector (Fig. 2.6-10). The characteristics of these are
described below.
Fig. 2.6-10. The sketch map of the HIPD structure
184

2.6.3.2 The position-sensitive area detector
Fig. 2.6-12. The position-sensitive area detector
There are eight detector banks on HIPD（Fig. 2.6-12） and their parameters are
185
given in Table 2.6-2. The tubes with 0.5 inch external diameter are filled with 3He and
CF4 at 20 bars, and the tubes with one inch external diameter are filled with 3He and
CF4 at 10 bars.
Table 2.6-2. The detector banks of HIPD

Detector Scattering Secondary Minimum Number of External
Bank angle 2θ flight path accessible 3He tubes diameter
(deg) (m) momentum (inch)
transfer
Qmin(Å-1)
Bank1 15±7.46 3.82 0.172~8.158 80 1.0
Bank2 90±14.00 2.00 1.630~33.008 160 0.5
Bank3 150±18.44 1.50 2.388~41.675 160 0.5
The thin resistive anode wire is tightened in the middle of the tube and relied on
both sides of the amplifiers. The neutron absorption by a target isotope molecule (3He)
induces a fission reaction and emission of two charged particles, one triton and one
proton, in opposite direction with a total kinetic energy of 760 keV which induces the
primary ionization in gas. The stopping gas has two roles. First it reduces the path
length of the electrons for a good position resolution and minimizes the wall effects.
Secondly, in an environment of high photon background, it has a low sensitivity to
gamma and X-rays. The impact position along the tubes is now measured by charge
division on the anode wire. Finally, each tube is an independent counter able to reach
100 kHz at 10% dead time correction.
186
2.7 DATA ACQUISITION

Yubin Zhao (zhaoyb@ihep.ac.cn)
2.7.1 The electronics system of the 3He tube detector

For the neutron detection of the HIPD (High Intensity Powder Diffractometer),
we use the 3He linear tube as the two-dimension position-sensitive detector. The
subsequent electronics system reads out the signals from both terminals of the 3He
tube, obtains the messages about when and where the neutrons hit the 3He tube, and
sends theses messages to the user by the Data Acquisition Software system.
2.7.1.1 The design specification and demands of the system
There are two types of the 3He tube: one is Φ25.4×1000mm (effective length),
with 80 tubes needed in the system; the other is Φ12.7 ×1000mm, and the entire
system needs 320 tubes. The diameters of the two kinds of 3He tube are different.
Taking into account the simplification of the system, we will design the same
electronics system to deal with them. Each output signal of the 3He tube is a slow
pulse at the microsecond level, and the distance between the source and the
pre-amplifier is short, so there is no need to consider the reflection caused by
impedance mismatch. We can directly read the signal from the both sides of the 3He
tube.
Considering the two kinds of the tubes together, the number of the charge
readout channel is 800, and that of the neutron-flight-time readout channel is 400. The
count rate of a single 3He tube is 10Kn/s, and the period of the neutron beams is 40ms.
The design specification of the electronics system is set as Table. 2.7-1.
Table 2.7-1. the specifications of the readout system
187
2.7.1.2 The structure and design of the electronics system
Considering the requirements to the detector in HIPD, charge distribution

method is used to measure the axial position. As shown in Fig. 2.7-1, at the terminals
of every 3He tube, we get the charge information generated by the same particle, and
then confirm the position the particle hits the tube by the ratio of the charge.
Fig. 2.7-1. the diagram of charge distribution method
The whole readout system contains four parts: pre-amplifier, QTC (Charge and
Timing Circuit), DPC (Data Processing Circuit) and the fan-out circuit. Every part
will be discussed in detail as follows.
⑴ The pre-amplifier
As shown in Fig. 2.7-2, there are 8 channels on each pre-amplifier board. The
boards are placed close to the both end of the 3He tube, connecting directly with the
tube. We choose the charge-sensitive pre-amplifier, because it has several features:
good charge resolution, low noise and so on. The resolution of time measurement is 1
microsecond, the use of charge-sensitive pre-amplifier won’t have any impact on
timing measurement.
Keep in mind that the pre-amplifier should be placed near the end of the 3He tube
as much as possible.
Fig. 2.7-2. placement of the pre-amplifier
⑵ QTC
After the pre- amplifier, the signal is sent to the QTC board for future process.
Each QTC board deals with the signal from 16 channels. The main functions of the
QTC board include:
188
1) Amplifying and shaping

We use the traditional (CR)-(RC)3 method to shape the pulse processed by
pre-amplifier. The width of the shaped signal is controlled within 1.5 microseconds.
According to the expressions:
， 2.7-1
We get that the accumulation possibility of the signal in 1.5 microseconds is
about 0.11%. It’s OK in this design.
2) Acquire the charge message at either terminal of the 3He tube: QL & QR
Di
D3
t=tφ D2
DN
D0 D1
Vin
Clock
Fig. 2.7-3. diagram of numerical integration method
The numerical integration is used in measurement of the charge. We get the data
by sampling the waveform with the reference of the Clock, and get the charge value
by using the following formula.
2.7-2
After we get the charge at the two terminals, charge distribution method is used
to get the axial position Z:
Z＝KQL/(QL+QR)
3) Get the neutron-flight-time Tf—the interval between T0 and the time the
neutron hits the 3He tube.
The precision of time measurement is 1 microsecond. We can simply meet this
requirement. A counter under the frequency of 40 MHz is enough.
189
Fig. 2.7-4. block digram of the QTC board
⑶ DPC
The DPC board is placed near the QTC board closely, using point-to-point
transmission method to receive the data from 8 QTC boards. It processes and
packages the data, and sends the data to the PC. This module is the most important
part of the whole electronics system.
The readout of the data is based on Ethernet. The data of the DPC board is sent
to PC via the switches.
Fig. 2.7-5. block digram of the DPC board
190
The DPC board and its auxiliary circuits can deal with signals that belong to 64
tubes. 5 DPC boards are needed with tubes of the type one, while 2 are needed with
the type two.
⑷ The fan-out circuit of the T0
The main function of this module is receiving the external T0 signal and fanning
out it to the DPC boards.
In conclusion, all these parts of the readout system are bunched together with the
3
He tubes. In this way, there are only four wires in and out of the equipment: the
internet wire, T0 wire, low-voltage power wire and the high-voltage power wire. The
structure is very simple.
2.7.2 The electronics system of the MWPC

MWPC (MultiWire Proportional Chamber) is used as the two-dimension
position-sensitive detector of the Multi-purpose Reflectometer. With an area of
200mm*200mm, the MWPC consists of two signal-wire planes and the anode-wire
plane in the center. Four signal wires are tied together, forming one readout strip.
There are 100 strips in total.
2.7.2.1 The critical parameters and specifications of the MWPC
Table 2.7-2. the specifications of the readout system

Description specifications remarks
channel 100
Dynamic range of the charge in 10－300fc
a single channel
Rise time of the input signal ～50ns
Bottom width of the input signal ～500ns
Count rate of a single channel ～100K/S
Q resolution σQ 8fc typical value
Q INL 1.5%
2.7.2.2 The structure and design of the electronics system
According to the specifications mentioned above, the design proposal is shown

as follows. There are five parts in the whole electronic system: readout-strip
pre-amplifier, anode-wire pre-amplifier, MQ (MWPC Charge Measurement) board,
CAC (Control and Calibration) board and the fan-out board. Each part is designed
under the rules of VME64X except the pre-amplifier.
191
Fig. 2.7-6. the block diagram of the system
⑴ Readout-strip pre-amplifier
The readout-strip pre-amplifier is used to receive the signal from the strip. There
are 8 channels on every pre-amplifier, and the whole system need a number of 14
pre-amplifiers in total. Charge-sensitive pre-amplifier is adopted in the purpose of
charge resolution as good as possible. What’s more, high voltage protect circuit is
placed at the input, connecting directly the readout strip. When the input charge
reaches maximum—300fc, the output is controlled within -1V-+1V. The system needs
a bandwidth of about 50 MHz, with the rise time being about 7 nanoseconds. After
being amplified, the signal is sent to subsequent MQ board for further process..
In1
30 pin connector to the following
……
×8
processing circuit
In8
Calib_gen
±5V
Fig. 2.7-8. the block Fig. 2.7-9. a view of Fig. 2.7-10. a view of
diagram of the the readout strip the anode
⑵ Anode-wire pre-amplifier
Being used to receive the negative signal from anode wire, this pre-amplifier has
only one channel. High-voltage DC block capacitor and protect circuit are used at the
input. The signal from anode wire need two processes: one is sent to generate a trigger
signal, while the other is to measure the energy spectrum. Therefore, the
charge-sensitive pre-amplifier is adopted, with one input channel but two output
channels: one channel sent to MQ board for charge measurement in differential mode,
192
a same process with that of the readout strip; the other sent to the CAC board,
generating the trigger signal.
⑶ MQ board
The signal is whether from the readout strip or from the anode plane, it must be
sent to the subsequent MQ board for further processing after being pre-amplified. The
MQ board can deal with 16 channels from two pre-amplifiers.
The electronics system can work under either online mode or calibration mode,
decided by the CAC board. When needing to verify electronics system performance,
MQ board works under calibration mode. As shown in Fig. 2.7-11. , the MQ board
includes the following main parts: amplifier, Flash ADC, FPGA chip, DAC, VME
back-plane interface and the external interface.
Fig. 2.7-11. the block diagram of the MQ board
The MQ board contains 16 main

amplifying channels, connecting with the
pre-amplifier from which to receive the 16
differential analog signals. Every channel
contains the CR-(RC)3 shaping circuit. The
output from pre-amplifier is shaped to a
positive signal with bottom width of 500ns
and sent to the ADC for sampling. DC
coupling method is used from the
pre-amplifier to the MQ board. AD9215
acts as the ADC chip, sampling at the rate Fig. 2.7-12. photo of the MQ
of 40MSPS, with a sampling precision of
10bit.
XC4VSX35-10C, an FPGA from Xilinx, acts as the heart of the MQ board, is
responsible for all kinds of control logic.
The digital output interface module contains the drives of 3 differential signals,
the clock, the trigger and the start signal, which are all LVPECL standard signals
fanned out by the CAC board. Between them, the clock is the frequency that the
193
system works at, the trigger is used as the trigger signal in the system, and the start
indicates the start of the calibrating process.
⑷ CAC and FAN boards
The main function of the CAC board is receiving the output signals of the
anode-wire pre-amplifier, discriminating them, then sending them to the FPGA to
generate a width-fixed trigger signal, and finally fanning out it to the MQ board.
2.7.2.3 Performance tests of the system
When debugging the electronics system, the function and performance of every
channel need to be tested to verify the performance of the readout system. The tests
contain waveform rebuilding, charge resolution and the INL of the charge. The
process is shown as follows: First, setting the calibration voltage and the threshold of
the MQ board. After continually reading the maximum value which indicates the
charge 1000 times, the results are given out. Fig. 2.7-13 shows the scatter gram，and
the test of the INL is shown in Fig. 2.7-14.
Fig. 2.7-13. charge resolution Fig. 2.7-14. Q INL
When connecting with the MWPC detector, the charge measured from the anode
wire can be used to measure the spectrum of the input particle. Fig. 2.7-15 shows the
spectrum of the 55Fe 5.9kev X-ray. The position distribution of the 55Fe X-ray after
calibration is shown in Fig. 2.7-16.
What’s more, the position resolutions when MWPC being vertical and horizontal
to the anode wire are also tested, and the result are 0.28mm and 0.40mm.
Fig. 2.7-15. the spectrum of Fig. 2.7-16. positional

55
Fe 5.9 keV X-ray distribution of the X-ray
194
2.7.3 Data acquisition software system
2.7.3.1 Function of the system
As shown in Figure 2.7-17, weak electrical signals generated by detector will be

amplified by Pre-amplifiers and then be transmitted to the Electronics System. After
amplification, reshaping, discriminating, digitizing and other processing, digitized
data are packaged into data packages, and then sent to the Online Data Acquisition
Software system (DAS) for further processing. Data acquisition software system is
responsible for run control, data readout from front-end electronics and processing,
histogram display, data storage, as well as the calibration of front-end electronics
system.
Electronics
Detector PreAmp DAQ
System
Fig. 2.7-17. System Diagram
2.7.3.2 Design scheme of DAS system
The Electronics hardware is designed to be pipelined. Digitized data will be sent

to the host computer via high-speed fiber-optic network. According to the estimations
of event rate and event length, high-speed fiber-optic network will fully satisfy the
needs of data transfer and real-time performance requirements.
Data acquisition software system will use advanced computer and network
technologies, which will bring the system high reliability, high stability, and also
make it easy to upgrade and expand. Equipments and software development tools will
focus on future technology trends. Commercial products with good price/performance
will be purchased.
Data acquisition software system needs to achieve the following tasks:
(1) Receiving front-end electronic data via optical fiber and Ethernet switches;
(2) Design and implement the hardware configuration and control for the
front-end electronics;
(3) Design DAS system integrated graphical user interface (IGUI) and implement
the system-wide operation control, as well as status monitoring and reporting, e.g.,
Electronics hardware failure, network problems, invalid or wrong operation, buffer
overflow, etc.;
(4) The realization of the basic online software, such as histogram presenting,
195
hit-map and spectrum display;

(5) Data storage to local RAID Disks and to central mass storage system;
(6) Providing online calibration, electronics testing and network environmental
monitoring and other auxiliary support systems;
(7) Design and implement of online database management system, exchanging
information with Detector Control System (DCS) and Accelerator System.
2.7.3.3 System architecture
The System architecture is in Figure 2.7-18. The whole system consists of

Ethernet switches and a number of PC servers.
As a central network device, Online Ethernet Switch connects the front-end
Electronics system, DAS System and the Detector Control System. One PC server is
responsible for operational control, histogram display and online database server.
Another PC equipped with a large RAID disk arrays will act as a file server and a
storage server, which is responsible for data acquisition and local storage. In order to
ensure system security and the normal data acquisition, these two PC servers are not
directly connected with the external network. The outside PCs can only access
required information and data through the Web server, which has firewall software
installed.
The Online Ethernet Switch equipped with fiber modules, provides high data
transfer bandwidth. Front-end electronic systems and Data acquisition software
system file server are connected to the switch through optic fibers, which ensures
high-speed mass data transfer and storage.
196
Fig. 2.7-18. System Architecture of DAS
197
3 EXPERIMENTAL CONTROL AND

UTILITY
198
3.1 EXPERIMENTAL CONTROL

Dapeng Jin (jindp@ihep.ac.cn)
3.1.1 Tasks, functions and system design
(1) Tasks
The experimental control system provides the overall means to control the
behaviors and monitor the status of the devices of the target station and instruments.
Also, the MPS (Machine Protection System) and fan-out of T0 related signals should
be implemented with the cooperation of the accelerator control system. PPS
(Personnel Protection System) as a whole is designed globally by the utility and
operation division.
Main tasks of the experimental control system are listed below:
1) Tasks from the target station
 Control and monitoring of the shutters;
 Control and monitoring of the cryogenic system;
 Control and monitoring of the H2 circulation;
 Control and monitoring of the heavy and light water cooling system;
 Control and monitoring of the helium gas supply;
 Control and monitoring of the target maintenance trolley;
 Safety interlock within the target station and instruments, with the
accelerator control and PPS systems;
2) Tasks from the instruments
 Control and monitoring of the choppers;
 Fan-out of the T0 related signals;
 Control and monitoring of the sample platform;
 Control and monitoring of the high voltage;
 Control and monitoring of the low voltage;
 Control and monitoring of the electronics crates;
 Control and monitoring of the detector working gas supply;
 Safety interlock within the target station and instruments, with the
accelerator control and PPS systems;
3) Overall tasks
 Video monitoring of the important areas in the target station and instruments
hall, cryogenic room, basement and the other places;
 Temperature and humidity monitoring in the target station and instruments
hall and the other places if needed;
(2) Functions
To fulfill the tasks above, the control system should have the following
functions.
 Global hardware and software architecture to provide overall framework and
tools;
 Local interface to control and monitor the devices;
199
 Database service and history records consultation;

 Remote web access;
 Front end device control and low speed data acquisition;
 Interface with the accelerator control and PPS systems.
(3) System design
1) System architecture
Based on the requirements and experiences from BEPCII( Beijing Electron
Positron Collider II) and the other experiments, EPICS is chosen as the software
framework after comparison with the other tools, such as LABVIEW, PVSS and DIM.
PLC(Programmable Logic Controller), the mature industrial products, are chosen as
the front end control units. For temperature and humidity monitoring, ARM + One
Wire Bus solution is taken for price issues.
Integration of all front end units into the EPICS network is based on TCP/IP to
ease the system extension and probable high speed data transmission except for some
typical applications. Fig. 3.1-1 shows the overall system architecture except for the
video monitoring and the T0 related signals fan-out.
The system is divided into 3 layers, FEL(Front End Layer), LCL(Local Control
Layer) and GCL(Global Control Layer).
Front end layer is related to device level control, which is composed of control
units, sensors, data acquisition module and so on.
Local control layer provides interfaces to corresponding experts including
control and monitoring means, data graphing, alarm, history records consultation and
so on.
Remote access from the internet outside is implemented in the global control
layer through firewalls.
200
Fig. 3.1-1. Overall architecture of the control system of the target station
and instruments
In the global control and local control layers, commercial switches and servers
are used. In the front end layer, PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is used for the
device control for its good performance and reliability, ARM and one wire bus are
used for temperature and humidity monitoring for price considerations.
3.1.2 Network design

Network of the global control layer is based on the commercial switches with
redundant design as shown in Fig. 3.1-2.
It is a star structure with core switches at the center and edge switches as the
branches for each device control node and other purpose. Global control and database
service is provided in the central control room.
201
Fig. 3.1-2. Network structure of the global control layer
Network of the front end layer control is based on the industrial switches and
network loop as shown in Fig. 3.1-3.
Fig. 3.1-3. Network of the front end layer control
202
Central control and monitoring are chosen since the enough speed of the network
loop. Also, the system reliability and robustness can be improved a lot by applying
reliable and expensive units on the control and monitoring path between the front end
layer and the global layer. For the local control layer, EPICS clients are applied with
normal PCs since the information safety not affected by the breakdown of the clients.
The overall network is shown in Fig. 3.1-4.
PLC
PLC
Control
Terminal Server
Client Control PLC
Terminal
Control Operator
Terminal Client
Client
Client
PLC
PLC
Control
Control Terminal
Terminal
Client Client
Control
Control Terminal
Terminal
Control Server
PLC Terminal PLC
PLC PLC
Network of global control layer

Network of front end layer
Fig. 3.1-4. Overall network of the control system
3.1.3 Interface with the other systems
(1) Interface with the accelerator control

 Safety interlock signals with dedicated wires in case of emergency and
access to some of the controlled areas;
 T0 related signals for synchronization of the neutron choppers to the
extracted beam and time measurement of the instruments’ electronics;
 Data exchange with EPICS through routers.
203
(2) Interface with the utility and operation system

 Normal safety interlock signals;
 Hydrogen safety interlock signal to turn on the high power fans in case of
hydrogen leakage;
 Safety interlock signals with the personnel protection system.
204
3.2 EXPERIMENTAL UTILITY

Bingyun Zhang (zhangby@ihep.ac.cn)
3.2.1 Introduction
According to functional requirements, experimental hall can be divided into five
areas: target station hall, No.1&No.2 Instrument Halls, basement and user lab. Target
station hall consists of four parts: target station, hot cell, service area and auxiliary
service area. Layout of Experiment Hall, water supply & drainage system, ventilation
& compressed air system and power distribution system are included in this report.
“TARGET COOLING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY DESIGN REPORT” and
“DESIGN CRITERIA DOCUMENT for UTILITY SYSTEM of CSNS TS&NI” are
attachment files.
3.2.2 Overall layout of experimental hall
Fig 3.2-1. The Experimental Hall Layout
The total experimental hall is 95 meters long and 70 meters wide. The target
station hall covers an area of 1792 m2 (28m×64m), with 2 transport passages. The
target station hall is in the middle of experimental hall, and No.1&No.2 Instrument
Halls are on both sides of it. No.1 Instrument hall is 64 meters long and 26 meters
wide, with one transport passage and two personnel accesses. No.2 Instrument hall is
64 meters long and 31 meters wide, with one transport passage and two personnel
205
accesses.
User laboratory has three floors, covering an area of 1920 m2 (10m×64m×3)
with one personnel access.
Basement is approximate 650 m2, with one tunnel and one personnel access.
Target station building has one 50t crane, while No.1& No.2 Experimental hall
have one 30t crane each.
Layout of each floor is as follows:
Fig. 3.2-2. The first floor layout of the Experimental Hall
206
Fig. 3.2-3. The second floor layout of the Experimental Hall
Fig. 3.2-4. The top floor layout of the Experimental Hall
3.2.2.1 Target station Hall
(1) Target station Hall

CSNS target is designed with horizontal maintenance; the structure of the target
station is as Fig. 3.2- 5.
207
HYDRAULIC DRIVER
TOP CONCRETE SHIELD
STEEL SHIELD
CONCRETE
SHUTTER
SHIELD
OUTER CONCRETE
CONCRETE
SHIELD
INNER STELL SHIELD
BEAM LINE SHIELD

UPPER MODERATOR BEAM LINE SHIELD
LOWER MODERATOR
T0 Chopper Cave
SHUTTER OPEN
SHUTTER BASE
BASE PLATE
(80Thickness)
IRON BASE LAYER
WATERPROOF CONCRETE LAYER
Fig. 3.2-5. The structure of the target station (vertical face of shutter)
Along the direction of the proton beam injection, the target station equipment is
set on the target base of the experimental hall, the centre of which is 24 meters from
the inner wall of the experimental hall. The main part of the target station is
positioned within an iron and concrete shield monolith 12m in the diameter. It is
8.25m high and approximately 6500t. The height of the main part is 8 m.
The design of target station shall take shield and floor load into consideration. As
shown in fig. 3.2-4, from bottom layer to the top layer, the foundation bed can be
divided into four parts: a waterproof concrete layer (according to actual needs), a steel
base layer with 1.5m thickness, a reinforced concrete base layer with 250 mm
thickness and a steel base layer with 80 mm thickness.
(2) Hot Cell
This area is mainly used for maintenance of TMR system, Helium Vessel system
(including NBW & PBW) and other components needed to be maintained. Net size of
the hot cell is 5.5 m (l) x5m (w) x6m (h). The thickness of the shielding wall around
the hot cell is 1.2 m. The distance from the anterior wall of the hot cell to the target
station center is 6.6m.
(3) Service area
The net size of the service area is 23.5 m (l) x 9 m (w) x 7 m (h) and thickness of
the wall is one meter (tentative). The service area is closing to the hot cell, with
transfer tracks in the ground. The hot cell and the service area are separated by
shielding blocks. This area is mainly used for maintenance of the cryogenic system &
the water cooling system. The service trolley is 10 meters long and 6.3 meters wide,
the migration length of the service trolley is 8.75m. This area has a certain dose of
radiation, which requires separate a ventilation system and a drainage system, with
208
special fire passage.

(4) Auxiliary Service Area
Auxiliary service area is located on both sides of the hot cell and the service area,
designed to narrow maze-type structure. A ventilation system and a fire passage will
be setup in this area According to function, it can be divided into: a manipulator cell, a
remote monitoring room for hot cell, a radiation protection room, a target control
room, a cryogenic system control room, a water system control room, a tool plant, and
a shower & changing room.
Fire fighting
Radiation protection room passage
Target Station Manipulator Room

(both sides) Tool plant
Auxiliary Service Area Shielding door
Proton Beam Service Area

Hot Cell
Service Trolley
Viewing Window
Stairwell
Cryogenic control room

Water cooling control room
Fig. 3.2-6. The layout of TS Hall
(5) Platform on the top of the proton beam line

A concrete platform is settled on the top of the proton beam line, as high as the
walkway in the experimental hall. The dimension of the platform is 520 m2, for
maintenance of shutters, placement of control cabinets, and a visitor way.
The platform is mainly set for control cabinets of shutter, vacuum pumps, shutter
casks, cryogenic control and transfer equipments, ventilation facilities for the target
station system, etc. It consists of three parts, the middle part is movable and exactly
on top of the proton beam line, the other two parts are besides the outside shield of
proton beam line, symmetric and fixed.
Given a rough estimation, the total weight of the equipments on the platform is
150 tons.
The layout plan and 3-D plot are as follows:
209
Fig. 3.2-7. The layout plan of platform on the top of the proton beam line
stationary
movable parts
Fig. 3.2-8. A 3-D plot of platform on the top of the proton beam line
210
3.2.2.2 Instrument Halls
18 neutron beam lines are located in the instrument hall. As pink color shown,
three instruments are built on the first stage: small-angle Neutron scattering
Spectrometer(SANS), High Intensity Powder Diffractometer(HIPD), mutifunctional
Reflectometer(MR).
Fig. 3.2-9. The Neutron Beam Lines
3.2.2.3 Basement Layout
Consideration for the deposition and transfer of high radioactive waste,

maintenance for process equipments, a basement needed to be built under the ground
of service area.
The basement is divided into three parts: an equipment area, a waste storage area
and a transportation tunnel for high radioactive waste. The total area of the basement
is 650 m2, 200, 330, and 120 m2 separately. There are two walkways leading to the
equipment area and waste storage area separately, with two stair cases and one
elevator. Three hatches are set in the basement: a hot cell hatch, a basement hatch and
a service area hatch.
A transportation tunnel for high radioactive waste is mainly to transfer high
radioactive materials from hot cell, such as the target, plugs of the moderators and
some of high active liquid waste.
Some of equipments are set in basement for maintaining the heavy water system
and the light water system, for online and offline detection.
211
Target Station Hot Cell hatch
Hot Cell
tunnel
pipes collected
area
Equipment
Detected
Room
Equipment Waste
Area Storage
Area
Service Area
Maintenance
stair well hatch stair well
Room
& elevator basement
hatch
Fig. 3.2-10. The Basement Layout Plan
Waste storage area is for the storage of waste parts from the hot cell and the
service area .According the control level, the waste is set in different places of the
waste storage area.
Disposal of waste from the hot cell: a part replaced from TMR will be put in a
special lead pot, kept motionlessly in the storage wells until the radiation dose reaches
an acceptable level, transferred to waste storage area. When the radiation dose reaches
a safety standard, they will be conveyed to outside the hall.
Disposal of waste from Service area: the waste parts from Service area will be
directly stored into the waste storage area .After radiation dose detected to a safety
standard, they will be conveyed to outside the hall.
3.2.2.4 Auxiliary Building of Experimental Hall
This area is mainly for cryogenic system and can be divided into three areas: a
helium compressing room, a gas room and a tank area.
The helium compressing room is 20 meters long, 10 meters wide and 6 meters
height, with an eight-ton crane. The main equipments in the room are compressors, oil
separators and amount of activated carbon .
212
The area of gas room is 100 m2 (10m×10m). The main equipments are
hydrogen cylinders, helium cylinders, hydrogen purifiers, pipes and valves. Due to
inflammable hydrogen, the room should keep certain distance from the main building
and the roads. The design should comply with the fire safety rules.
The tank area is set for a liquid nitrogen tank, a helium tank and an air tank,
covering an area of 90 m2. There is a guard fence for safety.
Fig. 3.2-11. Layout of Auxiliary Building of Experimental Hall
3.2.3 Water supply and drain system

The target cooling system will supply and control the distribution of cooling
medium to remove the heat deposition and decay heat in the target station. The heat
load is based on the heat generated by the equipment of the target station. Its
designing is to meet the normal operation of various systems of target station, based
on this, taking full account of system reliability, safety and maintenance.
The target station is cooled by three independent cooling loops, which remove
approximately 181kW of heat when the target is operating at the 200kW full proton
beam power. Two of the cooling loops use light water, and the third loop uses heavy
water. The heavy water cooling system is used to remove the heat of target and
reflector. In addition, according to neutron performance, heavy water shall be used to
optimize neutron flux. The light water will be used for removing the heat from
pre-moderators, moderator and proton beam window. The light-water systems can be
divided into two separate cooling loops. The first loop which cools pre-moderator and
213
water-moderator is called moderator cooling loop, which uses the parallel pipeline
and the flow and pressure is adjusted by flow-control orifices. Another one which
cools proton beam window is called proton beam window cooling loop, which uses
single closed- pipeline.
The primary cooling loop uses a closed loop independent of the storage tank. The
deionized water as a heat transfer medium contact the cooling object and remove
devices heat directly. The heat of primary cooling loop uses plate heat exchangers
transfer heat to the secondary water system. The flow diagrams representing the
primary and secondary water system are depicted in Fig.3.2-12 and Fig.3.2-13.
Fig. 3.2-12. Primary water system
Fig. 3.2 -13. Secondary water system
214
Target station drainage system is used for collecting sewage from the target
station, hot cell, and service area etc. The sewage should be sent to the sewage tank in
basement through pipeline. The flow diagram representing the drainage system is
depicted in Fig.3.2-14.
For light water system, when it is in maintenance or any other special cases that
operation must be stopped, the water in the light water system is drawn back to the
drain tank by gravity and vacuum. When the system starts to operate, pump pumps
water out of the drain tank into supply tank and pipeline system. When the water
quality not meets requirements or special circumstances, it is discharged directly from
drain tank into the sewage tank in basement.
For heavy water system, when it is in maintenance or any other special cases that
operation must be stopped, the heavy water in the system is drawn back to the storage
tank by gravity and vacuum. When the system starts to operate, pump pumps heavy
water out of the storage tank into supply tank and pipeline system. In order to ensure
the concentration of heavy water, it will be added the purified heavy water
periodically to the storage tank in order to improve the rate of heavy water purity, as
needed, to replace losses or to control tritium concentration.
The cooling system is equipped with tray below the flange of and electrical
conductivity instrument to check leakage with the change in resistivity. In case of
leaks, drainage pipelines collect the leakage of heavy water. Heavy water room uses
stainless steel floor, and have a certain inclination to collect leakage of heavy water
and reduce pollution for the environment.
If the helium vessel to internal leakage, which may be three kinds of situation:
hydrogen leak, heavy water leaks and a light-water leak. Different leakage should
have itself charge away after separation of Helium Mixing Vessel.
215
Shield Shield
Deionized water supply
target station drain

Light water system Heavy water system
hot cell drain Maintenance District
To stack
N2 supply
L L
sewage tank
storage tank
Pipe flange joint
Pipe flange joint
Fig. 3.2-14. Target station, hot cell and maintenance distribute drainage system
3.2.4 Power distribution
3.2.4.1 Power distribution
The switch cabinets will be set due to location, equipment load and electrical
character. 18 switch cabinets are located at their neutron instrument respectively for
neutron instrument devices, each switch cabinet load is 70kW; 6 switch cabinets are
located at platform over the proton beam line, for chopper, neutron shutter and target
station control system, the totally load is 300kW; 2 switch cabinets are located at
auxiliary service area, for heavy water cooling system and light water cooling system
respectively, the totally load is 240kW; the hot cell switch cabinet is located at
auxiliary service area, the load is 160kW; the service cell switch cabinet is located at
auxiliary service area, the load is 80kW. Isolating transformer will be installed in the
switch cabinet if necessary for reduce the interference caused by external power grid.
216
Power supply busbar
QF1 QF2
T1 T2
QF4 QF3 QF5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3.2-15. diagram of power distribution structure
3.2.4.2 Power supply for significant devices
Some of target station and neutron devices require good power quality and
prolong power supply time. EPS and UPS can meet the requirement due to equipment
electrical character. Lots of experiment devices and IT devices are sensitive to voltage
fluctuation, and need uninterrupted power supply; therefore, UPS can meet their
requirement for continuous operation, this kind of devices usually are single-phase
supply, such as heavy water control system devices, light water control system
devices, shutter control system devices and so on. There are many pumps and motors
need to prolong power supply time to ensure the other machine stops safely, there is
heavy current of motor when it starts, EPS can meet their requirement, it contains
heavy water pump, light water pump, shutter and so on. Devices requiring good
power quality will be connected to variable frequency power supply.
3.2.4.3 Device grounding
There are many experiment devices and electrical devices in target station and
neutron instrument. Due to the normal operation and protection of devices, three kinds
of device grounding are needed: working grounding, protective grounding, and signal
grounding. Working grounding ensures power supply for device operation normally;
protective grounding is set for the safety of workers and devices because of short
circuit. Signal grounding is the reference signal for devices working in the low DC
voltage. Moreover, electrostatic grounding connects to hydrogen pipeline for
217
hydrogen safety; electromagnetic shielding grounding is set in the neutron instrument

hall for avoiding electromagnetic interference.
Working grounding is only earthed at the power supply output in transformer
substation and forbidden to earth repeatedly at any place. It is forbidden to connect to
PE line. Working grounding need independent grounding device to insulate other
grounding device including building steel structure.
Protective grounding utilizes the building steel structure as the grounding device,
if its earthing resistance does not satisfy the requirement; artificial grounding device
will be set. The earthing resistance must below 1Ω.
Signal grounding is an important grounding for experiment device normal
operation, and affect the quality of experiment results. The signal grounding detail is
shown in fig.3.2-16.
Two rectangle ground grids are set at both sides of neutron instrument hall
outside the building, its earthing resistance below 0.5Ω, and it is isolated to building
steel structure grounding device. Moreover, the steel shielding is a grounding device
as signal grounding for control device around target station, and its earthing resistance
below 0.5Ω.
18 signal grounding boxes are set for control device such as 18 chopper control
system and 18 shutter control system, 4 signal grounding boxes are set in the service
cell, hot cell, auxiliary service area, basement respectively for control devices. All of
signal grounding boxes mentioned is connected to the steel shielding respectively and
independently.
18 signal grounding boxes are set for 18 neutron instrument in neutron
instrument hall connected to grounding grid near their neutron instrument respectively
and independently.
4 signal grounding boxes are set for target station control device from the
grounding grid of both sides.
TS&NI Grounding layout
User experiment building
Auixliary service area
Basement
service cell
Hot cell
NO.1 NI Hall NO.2 NI Hall
运输通道
Target Startion
Proton beam
TS Hall
grounding device
(earthing resistance below 0.5Ω)
4 signal grounding boxes 22 signal grounding boxes

(earthing resistance below 0.5Ω)
9 signal grounding boxes 9 signal grounding boxes
Fig. 3.2-16. diagram of TS&NI Grounding layout
218
3.2.5 Ventilation & Compressed air design for Exp. Halls

The main ventilation areas are target station hall and basement. Radioactive areas
are: Target Station Hall target station shield, hot-cell and service area; Basement:
equipment area, waste storage area and tunnel. HEPA filters are set both at the inlet
and outlet of ventilation of radioactive areas. If there could be hydrogen leakage,
detection for hydrogen condensation is needed before air ventilation.
Compressed air is used for clean and valve control. In maintenance areas, such as
service area, compressor room, basement and instrument halls, compressed air is
required for cleaning. Accumulate tanks are applied in cryogenic system for valve
control.
3.2.5.1 Ventilation system design of target station hall
Fig. 3.2-17 shows the pressure depression distribution in TS Hall

Table 3.2-1 shows the Ventilation Modes for TS Hall, for more modes, each areas
ventilation system will described in detail.
Proton
Equipment
Beam
Passage
Fig. 3.2-17. Pressure depression distribution（ ≤-400， =-80Pa ，

Others-10Pa）
219
Table. 3.2-1. Ventilation Modes for TS Hall

Mode Beam On Transition Maintenance
TS Pressure Depression (Pa) -550 -550 -400

Shield Airflow rate (m3/h) 5000 5000
Pressure Depression (Pa) -400 -400 -400
Keeping
Hot Cell Gas changes per hour 10 10
Pressure
Airflow rate (m3/h) 825 825
Pressure Depression (Pa) -80 -80 -80
Service Keeping
Gas changes per hour 5 5
Area Pressure
Airflow rate (m3/h) 3700 3700
(1) Ventilation for target station shield

Ventilation of this area mainly removes the heat deposition from shield outside
the helium vessel and shutters. Pressure depression is 550 Pa and heat load is about 22
kW. The temperature of inlet air is about 17°C, keeping the shield without moisture
condensation, and air rate is about 5000 m3/h. The moisture content is less than 1.2%,
with wet bulb temperature is 13°C.
Ventilation of target shield has two modes: when beam on and transition state,
pressure depression and air rate will be maintained by fans and vent to RTBT; when at
maintenance time, ventilation system in hot cell shall keep the depression both in
target station shield and hot cell, air inlet and outlet of target station will be shut down,
then the air is vent to the stack. Air exhausting from target station shield is interlocked
with RTBT.
(2) Ventilation for Hot Cell
Hot cell provides space for maintaining and temporarily store the exposed target,
moderators and other activated components. The pressure in hot cell is kept on -400Pa
level for keeping the airflow from hot-cell to target station shield. Leak tightness of
hot-cell is demanded to be high for preventing activated air diffusing to surroundings,
especially uncontrolled areas. When proton beams shutdown, components
maintenance or renewal, the dose of radiation is so high that this area needs high air
changing rate. Meanwhile, HEPA filters are set both at air inlet and outlet, then the air
is exhausted via the duct to stack.
Before proton beams is shutdown and the TMR vessel is dragged to hot-cell , the
hydrogen is discharged. There maybe exists hydrogen leakage in hot-cell, emergency
mode with high air change rate will start if hydrogen volume ratio is out of limit.
Smoke detectors in hot-cell are installed and interlock with beam.
(3) Ventilation for service area
The primary cooling system and cryogenic plants are housed in service area. The
220
cooling water from target station is radioactive and pressure depression is set 80 Pa.
The air passes service area should be filtered with HEPA before vent to stack.
Considering the demand of explosion-proof room, which intake air from service area,
the relative humidity between 55% and 65% will be suitable, the temperature is
24±3°C. Compressed air is required with 0.6Mpa for cleaning.
(4) Ventilation for explosion-proof room
Explosion-proof room for keeping hydrogen safety is mounted on a trolley which
also carries primary cooling systems, cooling auxiliary system, shields. The pressure
depression in explosion-proof room is 250 Pa, the relative humidity is large than 50%,
the temperature is 24±3°C. The ducts for air extraction from the room are
anti-explosion and the air going to atmosphere by hydrogen discharging stack.
(5) Ventilation for auxiliary service area
The auxiliary service area is low radioactive. Hot-cell operation rooms in the
area are for manipulator, depression pressure of them is 80Pa and air change rate is 5
times per hour when someone working in. The ventilation of hot-cell operation rooms
is vent to auxiliary service area directly.
The other areas in auxiliary service area demand relative humidity less than 65%,
and temperature 24±3°C.
3.2.5.2 Ventilation requirement for Instrument halls
Relative humidity: ≤55%

Temperature: 22±3℃
3.2.5.3 Ventilation system design for basement
The basement belongs to a radioactive area. High hazardous is stored in waste

storage area, tanks and monitoring equipments are mounted in equipment area in
basement. The waste storage area demands pressure is 250Pa below ambient, and
equipment area demands -80Pa. The air change rates are 3 times pre hour for
equipment area and 5 times per hour for waste storage area before workers in. When
no one enters, the basement just keeping pressure depression is enough.
Table 3.2-2. Ventilation Modes for basement

Equipment area Waste storage area
Pressure Airflow rate Pressure Airflow rate
Mode
depression（Pa）（m3/h） depression（Pa）（m3/h）
Normal -80 Keep -250 Keeping
Pressure Pressure
Transition -80 4000 -250 2500
221
Tunnel
Monitering
Room
Equipment Waste
Area Storage
Area
stair well Maintenance stair well

& elevator Room
Fig 3.2-18 Pressure Depression Distribution of Basement（ =-250Pa ，

=-80Pa）
3.2.5.4 Ventilation requirement for Auxiliary Building
Relative humidity: ＜65%

Temperature: 24±3℃
222
Appendix 1
COOLING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY DESIGN

REPORT
Bingyun ZHANG, zhangby@ihep.ac.cn

Ning HE, hening@ihep.ac.cn
CSNS utility system group

Abstract
The water cooling systems remove approximately 181.01kW when the target is
operating at the 200kW full proton beam power. Each of the target cooling loops
transfers heat to the secondary water supply system through a heat exchanger. Based
on this, it is necessary to take full account of system’s reliability, safety and
conventional maintenance.
The target station is cooled by three independent cooling loops. Two of the
cooling loops use light water, and the third uses heavy water .The light water will be
used for removing the heat from pre-moderators, moderator and proton beam window,
and heavy water will be used for cooling tungsten target and reflector. Both heavy
water system and the light-water system can be divided into five sub-systems.
Delay tanks are employed in the return line to facilitate the localized decay of
some of the short-lived gamma and beta activity and to reduce the potential for
neutron activation of components.
During normal operations, water circulates in a closed loop independent of the
storage/drain tank. During shutdowns, the water trapped in piping and technical
components may be drained to the storage/drain tank with either pressured gas or
vacuum. The drain system will be provided to facilitate the collection, detection and
disposition of water that may leak from cooling water system piping/components. The
light water which is beyond the using scope and the leakage from tanks or piping shall
be collected with a drain line, which shall be run into the sewage tank in basement.
The cooled components are located in the target service bay. Active components,
e.g., pumps, delay tanks, supply tanks, heat exchangers and motor-operated valves,
are generally located on service trolley. Storage tanks, waste tanks and pumps are
located in the basement. During beam-on operation, the radiation levels on service
trolley containing the activated water loop components (i.e., light water loops and
heavy water loop) will preclude personnel access. No maintenance of components on
the service trolley will be possible during bean-on operation. Access for hands-on
maintenance will be delayed until background dose rates drop to acceptable levels
after the beam has been turned off.
Localized shielding is provided, as required, to address the anticipated deposition
of the longer-lived radio nuclides (e.g., Be-7) in system components (e.g., heat
exchangers, ion exchange units, or filters). Inert purge gas is supplied as needed to
maintain the long-term buildup of hydrogen or deuterium below the lower flammable
limit. The exhaust gas is vented via the underground gas tunnel.
Cooling system components shall be fabricated from 316L stainless steel. Piping
system shall be fabricated from 304SS stainless steel. Pipe welding will be by the gas
tungsten arc welding process. Where welding is not practical or where
quick-disconnected capability is needed, flange shall be used. All pipes and fittings
shall be stainless steel, Seals and joints are to be limited to the maximum extent
possible to reduce potential leaks.
1 Introduction
The target cooling system will supply and control the distribution of cooling
medium to remove the heat deposition and decay heat in the target station. The heat
load is based on the heat generated by the equipment of the target station. Its design is
intended to meet the normal operational parameters of various systems of the target
station, based on this, taking full account of system reliability, safety and
maintenance.
The target station is cooled by three independent cooling loops. The cooling
loops remove approximately 181.01kW when the target is operating at the 200kW full
proton beam power. Two of the cooling loops use light water, and the third uses heavy
water .The light water will be used for removing the heat from pre-moderators,
moderator and proton beam window, and heavy water will be used for cooling
tungsten target and reflector.
Both heavy water system and the light-water system can be divided into five
sub-systems (Table 1-1).Cooling loop1 and 3 pass directly through intense neutron
fields emanating from the target. In addition, the full proton beam passes through loop
2cooling water in the proton beam window. The water and entrained impurities will
become significantly activated.
Delay tanks are employed in the return line of each activated water loop to
facilitate the localized decay of some of the short-lived gamma and beta activity and
to reduce the potential for neutron activation of components located in areas in which
access must be provided for maintenance. The delay tanks shall be sized to facilitate a
minimum of 90-second decay.
During normal operations, water circulates in a closed loop independent of the
storage/drain tank. At this time, it is expected discharge to the storage/drain tank will
only performed if required (e.g., due to an abnormal occurrence or to facilitate
maintenance on loop equipment). During shutdowns, the water trapped in piping and
technical components may be drained to the storage/drain tank with either pressured
gas or vacuum. The drain system will be provided to facilitate the collection, detection
and disposition of water that may leak from cooling water system piping/components.
The light water which is beyond the using scope and the leakage from tanks or piping
shall be collected with a drain line, which shall be run into the sewage tank in
basement. The lined basement floor area shall be sloped to direct leakage towards the
waste water tank. A low point sump shall be provided to facilitate leak detection and
recovery. Features to facilitate use of a portable pump to remove water shall be
provided.
Each of the target cooling loops transfers heat to the secondary water supply
system through a heat exchanger. For cooling loops 1 and 2, during normal operation,
differential operating pressures are maintained so that secondary water is at a higher
pressure in the heat exchanger where cross-contamination could occur. Consequently,
any leakage through the barriers that separate the fluids would be from the secondary
water side to the target cooling loop side of the heat exchanger
Water quality is maintained by bypassing a faction of the total flow through
A1-1
filters and ion exchange columns- in order to ensure loop waste concentrations do not
exceed the accepted levels. Spent resin columns and filters will be replaced as needed
based on either component dose rate or water quality. The loop is instrumented to
allow operators to monitor appropriate operational parameters
The cooled components are located in the target service bay. Active components,
e.g., pumps, delay tanks, supply tanks, heat exchangers and motor-operated valves,
are generally located on service trolley. Storage tanks, waste tanks and pumps are
located in the basement. During beam-on operation operation, the radiation levels on
service trolley containing the activated water loop components (i.e., light water loops
and heavy water loop) will preclude personnel access. No maintenance of components
on the service trolley will be possible during bean-on operation. Access for hands-on
maintenance will be delayed until background dose rates drop to acceptable levels
after the beam has been turned off.
Localized shielding is provided, as required, to address the anticipated deposition
of the longer-lived radio nuclides (e.g., Be-7) in system components (e.g., heat
exchangers, ion exchange units, or filters). Inert purge gas is supplied as needed to
maintain the long-term buildup of hydrogen or deuterium below the lower flammable
limit. The exhaust gas is vented via the underground gas tunnel.
Cooling system components shall be fabricated from 316L stainless steel. Piping
system shall be fabricated from 304SS stainless steel. Pipe welding will be by the gas
tungsten arc welding process. Where welding is not practical or where
quick-disconnected capability is needed, flange shall be used. All pipes and fittings
shall be stainless steel, Seals and joints are to be limited to the maximum extent
possible to reduce potential leaks. Connectors between the utility system and the
target modules shall be configured so as to limit loss of coolant during maintenance
operations. The configuration shall also provide a means to track leaks.
Target station
cooling system
Heavy
Light-water
water
system
system
circulation Control and circulation purification Protection Control and

purification Protection Vacuum Vacuum
monitoring
monitoring
system system gas system system system system system gas system system system
Fig. 1-1. Target station cooling system decomposition diagram
Table 1-1. Coolant loops and approximate estimated heat loads

Cooling loop Main component(s) served Design basis heat load
Cooling loop 1 (light water) Moderators, Pre-moderator 5.01 KW
Cooling loop 2 (light water) Proton beam window 1.5 KW
Cooling loop 3 (heavy water) Target ,and Reflector plugs 175.5KW
A1-2
2 Heavy Water System

2.1 Introduction
This section describes the heavy water cooling system, which is used to remove
the heat from the target and reflector. In addition, according to neutron performance,
heavy water shall be used to optimize neutron flux. The heavy water loop will be used
to light water during initial operation.
This system is critical to the operation of the facility. Therefore, it will be fully
redundant and will include features to facilitate maintenance. To preserve the heavy
water supply, a separate storage tank will be installed to contain the full loop capacity
during maintenance and shutdowns.
Impurity levels of heavy water shall not exceed 10%.In order to ensure the
concentration of heavy water will be added, purified heavy water periodically to the
storage tank in order to improve the rate of heavy water purity, as needed, to replace
losses or to control tritium concentration.
The operating characteristics of the system are as follows: Firstly, the fully sealed
operation mode will minimize the leakage of activated material. Secondly, an
electrical conductivity instrument and a setting tray at the flange will be installed to
check for and collect the leakage of heavy water. Thirdly, the backflow of condensate
into the heavy water collector will be allowed backflow into the heavy water collector.
The heavy water system uses the parallel pipeline, supplying water by two water
pump systems to ensure the accuracy of water supply. The flow diagram representing
the primary components in the heavy water cooling loop is depicted in Fig.2-1.
N2 Cylinder
Vacuum pump
delay
Supply tank tank
target
Condenser delay
Vent stack reflector tank
Plate heat
exchanger Filter
Ion-exchange
Filter column
Ion-exchange
column
water-collecting
tank
storage
tank
Fig. 2-1. Target Coolant Flow Circuit
A1-3
2.2 SUB-SYSTEM INTRODUCTIONS

This section mainly describes the heavy water cooling sub-system. Components
for these sub-systems are located on service trolley and basement. The sub-system
function, design and main process are discussed.
2.2.1 Heavy water Circulation System
The system is mainly deployed to cool down the target and reflector, so as to control
the temperature within the regulated parameters. The system incorporates supply tank and
storage tank of 306SS construction, pressurized to 400kp.A plate heat exchanger is used
in our specification based on safety, reliability, and ease of expandability in the event of
an upgrade.
In order to achieve high system reliability, a redundant pump will be installed in the
system. In this way, the water consumption can be effectively controlled. It uses the same
circuit, adopting the parallel pipeline connection and the water pump operates with
another one as backup. The main water supply pump, constructed of corrosion-resistant
materials, draws water from the supply tank. Furthermore, a delay tank is set up in every
circuit branch, allowing for a pause of 90s, in order to reduce the accumulation of
radioactivity and to lesson the effect on the environment and relevant equipment.
According to the operation experience of CARR and SNS, if the heat exchanger
adopts the Plate Heat Exchanger, the occupying area could be effectively decreased. In
addition, since the Plate Heat Exchanger has a smaller volume of inner flow pipeline,
heavy water consumption could be saved to some extent, as a result, production costs are
expected to be lower, and exchange efficiency raised.
The counter flow water-to-water heat exchanger, which is located upstream of the
pumps, moves the steady heat load of approximately 180kW.The supply tank, pumps,
heat exchanger and delay tank are located on service trolley and the storage tank are
located in the basement. The supply tank and storage tank are constructed of 316SS and
the liquid-level volume gauge is used to maintain the water level in the tank at
three-quarters full. The storage tank is located above the target pump suction to allow
reuse of the drained water. The supply tank has two connections for the target pump
supply and cooling system return piping. The supply line also connects the storage tank so
that water from the storage tank can be pumped back to the system. The supply tank and
storage tank have a regulated N2 supply for the initial pressurization and for providing a
continuous bleed to sweep radiolysis and activation products from the ullage space.
The target cooling pumps are constructed of corrosion resistant materials of SS316.
The pump outlet flow passes through a flow meter and then through a water-cooled heat
exchanger.
A1-4
2.2.1.2 Design parameters
(1) The total heat load 177.5 kW

(2) The heat load of target 125kW
(3) The heat load of iron reflector 30.2kW
(4) The heat load of beryllium reflector 22.3kW
(5) The target working pressure 4bar
(6) The reflector working pressure 1bar
(7) System design pressure 4 bar
(8) The inlet temperature of target and reflector 27±1 °C
(9) The outlet temperature of target and reflector 34±1°C
(10) Target flow rate 257.25 l/min
(11) Reflector flow rate 108.04 l/min
(12) Total flow rate 365.29 l/min
2.2.1.3 Design specification and standard
GB150-1998
2.2.1.4 Design requirements
(1) The system should be well sealed.

(2) The heavy water should be covered by a protective gas in order
to ensure its purity of heavy water.
(3) The system should be connected to the vacuum system.
(4) The heavy water cooling system should have adequate
instruments to monitor pressure, temperature and flow rate. In addition,
there should be a heavy-water leakage monitoring system
(5) The system should be equipped with sufficient valves to ensure
effective operation and maintenance of the system
(6) The connections between pipes should use welding. whereas the
connections between pipes and equipment should use flange
2.2.1.5 System process
Heavy water in the supply tank enters the circulation system through the
pump, and, after cooling down the target and reflector, it gains access to the respective
delay tank in the branch circuit where it remains for a period of 90s. Then the heavy
water enters the heat exchanger in preparing for the next round of cooling. When the
system starts to operate, the pump pumps heavy water out of the storage tank and into
the circulation supply tank and pipeline system. When maintenance is being carried
out, or under any other special circumstances whereby system operation must be
stopped, the heavy water in the system is drawn back into the storage tank by way of
A1-5
gravity and vacuum. In normal operation, the storage tank serves as the backup for
water supply when heavy water losses are caused by evaporation or a leak in the
pipework. Fig. 2-2 illustrates this in the form of a flow chart
Supply
tank
target
delay
reflector tank
Plate heat
exchanger delay
tank
Fig. 2-2. Heavy water Circulation System
2.2.2 Purification system
The heavy water system will produce some active products with neutron
irradiation. At the same time, the corroded pipes and the bodies of the target will also
produce some pollution that can deteriarate the quality of water and affect the normal
operation of the system.
The role of the water purification system is to purify the active products and to
ensure the water quality. The heavy water purification system is running in synchron
with the water cooling system and so can fully guarantee the quality of heavy water.
The main parts of the system are mechanical filter, mixed ion-exchange column, resin
trap, piping and valves, etc
The heavy water used in cooling loop is not required to have a high isotopic
purity (>90%). The required deuterium concentration will be maintained with the
periodic addition of fresh heavy water.
A1-6
Table 2-1. Active products in heavy water system

Nuclide Halftime (s) Activity released per year (Ci)
140cm 110cm 80cm
H3 3.89E+08 7.16E-04 1.14E-03 3.73E-03
(8.54E-02) (8.58E-02) (8.84E-02)
Be 7 4.61E+06 5.71E-03 8.36E-03 2.99E-02
C 11 1.22E+03 2.21E+00 3.89E+00 1.33E+01
N 13 5.98E+02 6.44E+00 1.14E+01 4.17E+01
N 16 7.13E+00 1.14E+00 2.12E+00 6.88E+00
O 15 1.22E+02 2.35E+00 4.51E+00 1.55E+01
Ar 41 6.58E+03 5.24E+00 8.83E+00 1.27E+02
Total 1.74E+01 3.08E+01 2.04E+02
(1) System design pressure 0.4 Mpa

(2) System design temperature 34±1°C
(3) Outlet temperature 27±1°C
(4) Flow rate Undefined
(5) Heavy water quality
Table 2-2 Heavy water quality

Item Value
Heavy water purity ≥90.0%
PD (25℃) Undefined
Resistivity(Mohm-cm) ≥1.5
DO (mg/kg) <0.1
suspended solid, mg/l ≤12
Be Undefined
T+ Undefined
GB150-1998
A1-7
2.2.2.4 Design requirement
(1) The outer layer of the resin tank uses a seal to prevent radiation.
(2) When the resin ion-exchange exchange-rate is lowers than the acceptable
rate, the resin is not removed from the ion-exchange column. The entire
ion-exchange column is treated as a radioactive waste
(3) The purification system’s heavy-water quality should be meet the water
quality requirements
Figure 2-3 shows the technology process of the heavy water purification system.
The major processes of the heavy water purification system are as follows: some of
the heavy water is discharged from the delayed tank outlet of the heavy water cooling
system, firstly passing through a mechanical filter to remove insoluble impurities;
then through two exchange columns, which can be used in series or parallel, where
ionized impurities and small amounts of solid particles and colloids in heavy water
can be removed; after that, fragmented resins trapped in the water can be intercepted
via a filter, and lastly the heavy water returns to the heavy water pump entrance.
The purification system operates together with the running of the heavy water
cooling system, and the power of the circulation system is supplied to the purification
system, so that there is no need for extra power plants. When the heavy water flow is
about 10% of the circulating water flow, the quality of heavy water can be guaranteed.
From delay
To pump
tank outlet
inlet
Filter
Filter Ion-exchange Ion-exchange

column column
Fig. 2-3 Heavy water purification system
2.2.3 Protective gas system
When the heavy water system is running, a part of heavy water will be
decomposed into O2, D2 and other explosive gases, and heavy water also has a small
amount of evaporation. A gas distribution system is provided in tanks (supply tank
and storage tank), as necessary, to facilitate its supply to its various uses. It provides a
N2 flow rate thought a back-pressure control valve for purging the ullage of O2, D2and
A1-8
other activation products (high-energy protons can also cause production of corrosive
NO radicals in air) and for stabilizing the tank pressure level. Bleed and vent gases are
routed to off-gas tunnel, which allows adequate time for radioactive species to decay.
The main functions of the protective gas system are as follows:
(1) Covering the supply tank and storage tank to minimize the activated
production and corrosive gases and to prevent flammable gas mixtures from reaching
the lower explosive limit concentration.
(2) Siphoning out the gas produced by the heavy water radiolysis, in order to
prevent the gas from accumulating and presenting a danger of explosion.
(3) Collecting the evaporated heavy water and reducing the amount of heavy
water evaporation
A central control system shall be provided to regulate the flow of N2. Pressure
and flow monitoring shall be provided on each line with connections to the target
station control system. N2 vents shall be connected to the off-gas system.
(1) Gas chamber total volume <1 m3

(2) Heavy water decomposition rate <1 %/day
(3) System operating temperature <50℃
(4) System operating pressure ≈0.4 bar
(5) Heavy water protective gas quality
Table. 2-3 Heavy water protective gas composition target

Item Value
N2 concentration ≥97%
D2 concentration
≤3%
O2 concentration
GB150-1998
(1) Isolation of heavy water and other media to ensure the quality of heavy
water.
(2) To siphon out the radiolysis gases timely.
(3) Equipped with vacuum pumping lines which is used to achieve the
operation of the system vacuum.
(4) System should have enough instruments to monitor the run-time pressure.
(5) System should be equipped with sufficient valves to ensure the effective
A1-9
operation of the system and heavy water vapor recovery after condensation.
Protective gas system equipped with condenser and heavy water collector and
other devices. Protective gas of storage tank and supply tank go through the condenser
to condense and collect the heavy water of molecules and droplets. Draining of
condensate from off-gas lines to heavy water collector will be provided.
By setting connected ventilation system hoses, protective gas can be discharged
directly. Protective gas is used with the operation of the system and exhausted to the
off-gas tunnel. In downtime or special circumstances, protective gas in the pipeline
shall be drawn out to the off-gas tunnel by vacuum pump. The main flow of protective
gas system chart is as follows.
N2
Cylinder
Supply
Condenser tank
Vent
stack
water-collecting
tank storage
tank
Fig. 2-4. Protective gas system
2.2.4 Vacuum system
The vacuum systems serve numerous purposes. Firstly, the vacuum system is used to
remove air from the cooling water system components prior to backfilling with heavy
water and protective gas and to maintain desired operating conditions within components.
Secondly, the vacuum system is used to remove residual water before maintenance and
checking during downtime. Thirdly, the vacuum systems are used to remove water from
being drawn into the vacuum pumping system.
The vacuum system for evacuating the heavy water cooling loop will be provided a
rough vacuum of 0.01-0.1 Torr within 60minutes.Vacuum system shall be located as close
as practical to components that being evacuated.
A1-10
(1) Working temperature 0~50oC

(2) Vacuum level requirement 0.01~0.1 Torr
(3) The total capacity of cooling loop 4m3
GB150-1998
(1) Drawing out the gas from the system timely and attaining the vacuum of
requirement.
(2) This system should be facilitating to remove and disposition of
entrained condensables.
(3) The air that this system draws out can be emitted safely into off-gas
tunnel.
(4) The system design should have enough instrumention to monitor the
pressure in order to achieve accuracy regarding the vacuum requirements.
(5) The system should have enough valves to ensure the effective operation
and the collection of heavy water vapor.
The main process of the vacuum system is as follows: The off-gas form pipes or
tanks should be chilled to collected condensation heavy water. Then it is emitted into
the off-gas tunnel. The flow chart is as follows in Fig.2-5.
A1-11
Vaccum
Supply
pump
tank
Condenser
Vent stack
water-collecting
tank storage
tank
Fig. 2-5. vacuum system
2.2.5 Control and monitoring system
2.2.5.1 Control system
(1) Control requirements and Control function

1 ) A safe and stable system
Because the heavy water system is running in the radioactive environment, a
request is totally enclosed operation, the security of the system is higher, we prevent
heavy water from leakage and other accidents; it is important to improve the remote
monitoring, interlock protection and event alarm to ensure the safe operation of the
system.
2) Automatic control and manual control
The system working in normal operation conditions, generally run automatically.
PLC central controller will automatically adjust the control parameters to achieve the
purpose of stable operation; in case of failure or emergency events, you can switch to
manual control mode. According to operation experience or emergency events
approach, manual control field devices, to be a relatively stable operating state, to
protect system security continue to work. There are automatic and manual modes for
valves control, remote monitoring and local control can adjust the valve opening.
3 ) Closed loop control
Automatic control system with closed-loop control can adjust control parameters
in real-time, to guarantee stable operation of the system. The heat of the target and
reflector generated by the neutron impact at different times is not a constant, so the
heat taken away by heavy water is different. Control parameters could maintain in the
vicinity of the given value by closed loop control for the purpose of stable operation.
4) Control precision
A1-12
When the heat load of the target and reflector is changing at any time, the
temperature is changing. According to the target and reflector material properties and
the demand of the heavy cooling water system, control parameters just can be
adjusted in small range, so the system requires control precision to satisfy control
demand, usually continuous regulation of heavy water and fast control can meet the
requirement of control precision.
5 ) Multi-running mode
Heavy water system consists of heavy water circulation system, water
purification system, protection gas system, vacuum system. Each subsystem has
different functions at different running mode; multi-running mode can achieve
different functions, implementing the ultimate goal that taking away the heat quantity
of the target and the reflector for safe and stable operation.
6) Remote monitoring and local control
Remote monitoring of field devices has been widely applied in industry control,
technology maturity and advantages of remote monitoring are apparent; the central
controller gets the information of parameters of heavy water system from field
devices and sensors, and then transforms the data to data server and remote monitor
by industry Ethernet. Operator can monitor and control the field devices in the central
control room. When some emergency events happen, we can deal with it as soon as
possible to avoid serious accident. Local control is necessary for the system; it is a
part of the system, in case of some unexpected events happen, including the
breakdown of the control network and so on. Local control can achieve the control
task, such as control operating, system debug, monitor device state and so on.
7 ) Data acquisition and data storage
The central controller gets important parameter data of heavy water system from
sensors and devices, and then it is sent to the data server and stored in the database; it
is the remote monitoring data source. We can get the historical data and real-time data,
from the database for monitoring and data analysis. It is helpful for daily operation of
system, because we get the whole information of system. Especially when some fault
happens, historical data can provide accurate information to find out why it happens,
and deal with the problem as soon as possible accurately. Also data is important
experience which will be used for system design and system optimization in the
future.
8 ) Event alarm
Faults often can not be expected, perfect event alarm plays an important part in
the system. Operators working in the control room though remote monitoring can
obtain all of the event alarm information such as voice alarm, light alarm, software
hints, when accidents happened. Operator can make a fast operating to deal with the
accidents. The event accident will be recorded in the database for analyzing accidents.
9) Signal interlocking
Heavy water system is an important part of the spallation neutron source; so it's
important to ensure that heavy water system is running safely and stably. Heavy water
system has much relationship with other systems; they are restricted by each other,
and require real-time react when other systems accidents occur. There are two kinds
A1-13
of signal interlocking. One is restricting other system, for example, before heavy
water start working, the proton beam is forbidden to impact target; another one is
restricted by other systems, for example, when the proton beam is working, shutdown
heavy water system is forbidden. Signal interlocking can deal with emergency
accidents in a short time automatically to ensure the system is safe.
(2) Control method
Heavy water cooling system is a typical water circulation system, its main
function is to take away the heat of control object, it is similar to the central
air-conditioning system, due to the particularity of heavy water system, it requires
higher safe level, especially about devices and instrument, but their operational
principle and control method are the same. According to the thermodynamics
equation Q =cm∆t , so m ∝ Q , the heat quantity is proportional to water flow. We
assume that the inlet water temperature is constant, so when we adjust the water flow,
the outlet water temperature changes, the heat quantity is transformed by the water
flow. This is the variable flow control method which is widely used in the water
cooling system and central air conditioning system.
Variable flow control means the water flow in the main water circulation is
variable. In the development history of variable flow control, the earlier system
usually used two-way valve to adjust water flow. there are some faults about this
method, such as adjusting range is small, the water pressure in the pipe changes too
much and too fast, it will brought out other problems making system unstable. And
then the water system used three-way valve to adjust water flow, there are some
advantages compared to the old system, for example, there are wide adjusting range.
But problem still exists, like that wasting energy and balancing pipe pressure and so
on.
As the development of inverter technology, the inverter price is going down and
performance is improving. Therefore the inverter is widely applied in industry control.
Variable flow control can use inverter to vary the motor speed to change the water
flow, implementing stepless speed adjusting. It is the high stage of variable control to
use inverter in the water cooling system, its advantages are apparent, for example, the
system structure is simple and reliable, control logic and method is easy, the water
flow can be adjusted continuously making system stable and safe, it must be a
energy-saving system.
Variable flow control will be applied in the heavy water cooling system, inlet
water temperature and outlet water temperature will be the control parameter in the
closed loop control system.
Inlet water temperature is adjusted by the heat exchanger. The heat quantity is
transformed from heavy water circulation to second water circulation, and then to the
atmosphere. The water flow going through the heat exchanger affects the inlet
temperature of heavy water, when the water flow is going up; the inlet temperature is
going down. Therefore, they make up of a closed loop control system to control the
inlet water temperature in a normal temperature. The control structure is shown in
figure 2-6.
A1-14
Electric Water Inlet

T2 △T2 current Voltage Heavy Heat temperature
flow
PLC Inverter
+
_ water pump exchanger
T`2
Fig. 2-6. diagram of inlet water temperature closed loop control structure
Due to the inlet water control, it will stay in a normal range, so the heat quantity
is reflected by the outlet water temperature, when the heat quantity rises, the outlet
water temperature is going up. As a result, outlet water temperature can be the control
parameter to control the water flow to take away the heat quantity of target and
reflector. This is a closed loop control for heavy water circulation. The control
structure is shown in figure 2-7 and figure 2-8.
Electric Water Outlet

T0 △T0 current Voltage Heavy temperature
flow
PLC Inverter Target
+
_ water pump
T`0
Fig. 2-7. diagram of target closed loop control structure

T1 △T1 Voltage Heavy temperature
current flow
PLC Inverter reflector
+
_ water pump
T`1
Fig. 2-8. diagram of reflector closed loop control structure
Water purification system is an important part of heavy water cooling system; it

takes a task that purifying the heavy water to meet the requirement of heavy water
purity. According to the present design parameters, it requires 10% of main circulation
heavy water flow to meet system requirement. The water flow going through the
water purification system is adjusted by the valve, and is proportional to main
circulation water flow, so the water flow can be the control parameter to adjust the
purification system water flow. The control structure is shown in figure 2-9.
Electric Inlet water

L0 △L0 current flow
+
PLC Valve
_
L`0
Fig. 2-9. diagram of water purification closed loop control structure
There are lots of valves to control the pipeline on or off in the system. Valves are
installed between two pipelines, there are two kinds of valves, one is switch style,
means only opening or closing; another one is continuous style, can be operated by
percentage. All of the valves can be operated through local control or remote control
by manual.
A1-15
(3) Control logic.

According to the three closed loop control system above, they make a control
logic, which is shown in figure 2-10.
Start
Initialization
Read control parameters
Y Target temperature
high
N
Target temperature Y Reduce

Add frequency
low frequency
Y Reflector temperature
high
N
Reflector temperature Y Reduce

Add frequency
low frequency
N
Y Purification water flow

much
N
Increase valve Purification water flow Y Decrease valve

opening little opening
N
Fig. 2-10. diagram of control logic
(4) Control system hardware structure

The hardware structure of control system is shown in figure 2-11; it consists of
remote monitoring device and local control device, to implement control function and
satisfy control requirement.
Local control devices include central controller, inverters, heavy water pumps,
valves, control panel and various sensors. The main function of sensors is to get the
information of various parameters, and transferred to central controller by electric
signal. Due to the sensors signal, central controller sends the control signal to control
device such as valves and inverters, it makes up of a closed loop system. All of the
valves and parameter setting can be operated with control panel which is an important
part of local control device and is the interface between local device and operators.
The local control instrument is good for debug and operation of system. When the
remote monitoring is out of control for network fault, local control will plays an
important part of control.
Remote monitoring devices include data server, management server, web server,
client PC. Remote monitoring devices are connected to local control devices by
A1-16
industry Ethernet. Data server communicate with PLC in real-time, and obtain the
latest data continuously, which will be saved in the database. Manage server takes
charge of the client PC logging on manage server for remote monitoring. Client PC
can monitor the system and send an operation control signal to PLC if necessary. Web
server provide web service for outside authorized client to access server though
internet.
Fig. 2-11. diagram of control system hardware structure
(5) Control system software structure

The control system software structure is shown in figure 2-12; including PLC
control software, control panel software and remote monitoring software.
PLC control software is the core of the whole software structure. It is the most
basic software, used to get the sensors data and device state and control local device.
Therefore, the software takes charge of controlling the local I/O device, adjusting
valves, controlling inverters, get data from various sensors and devices state.
Control panel software works for local control. Control panel communicate with
PLC and achieve data exchange, the software embedding control panel can access the
registers of PLC to achieve the parameters set and control function,
Remote monitoring software is an important part of software structure, which
plays an important part in daily operation. It contains data service software,
management software and web software. Generally speaking, data server get data
from PLC by industry Ethernet, saved in the database, Implementing data acquisition
and data storage. The client PC can use management software to log on management
server to access the data and monitor the operation of system. The outside client can
view the status of system though web server by internet, Remote monitoring software
implements remote control function, including data acquisition, data storage, events
alarm, parameters setting, data display, data analysis, access control, remote control,
web service and so on.
A1-17
Web server
Control panel
C
d
ev
ru
Software function
spi
C
no
ep
o
lo
no
ar
Software function
it
rt
D
lp
d
ya
a
si
at
m
P
gn
re
te
a
es
ar
tit
m
A
a
ec
c
ss
rm
E
tn
ev
a
al
W
m
go
be
P
lp
d
ni
l
ya
re
te
a
ar
si
D
iv
tea
ec
e
ts
Data server
D
Software
no
iu
qc
a
a
is
function
it
at
D
eg
a
s
ar
ot
at
Data base
PLC control program
Management server
C
po
lo
no
rt
D
ln
ez
ya
a
a
at
m Software function
P
re
te
a
ar
C
lp
d
ev
ru
ya
si
D
lp
d
Control object Sensor

ya
taa
si
m
A
a
ec
c
ssm
E
tn
ev
ra
la
Fig. 2-12. diagram of control system software structure
2.2.5.2 Monitoring system
(1) Introduction
In order to ensure adequate water quality and running operation safety of heavy
water system, it is necessary to monitor the operation parameters of the system, such
as its flow (flow sensors), pressure(pressure sensors), temperature(temperature
sensors), liquid level(liquid level sensors), gas pressure, gas composition and water
quality (Radioactivity, conductivity, pH). The water quality standard shall be
maintained as specified in the 2.2.2.1 parameters.
The monitoring system shows the parameters of operational conditions and
activity measurement, and transmits the data of thermal instruments via computer.
When the thermal parameters are beyond normal operation values, it is necessary
to send an automated alarm signal via the alarm system to warn the operators to take
effective measures. When some key thermal parameters go beyond the permitted
safety limits, the spallation reaction should be stopped immediately by the accident
protection system.
(2) Design requirements
1) The thermal parameter monitoring system requirement
a Measure accurately, respond intelligently, convenient to maintain;
b Adoption standard, and serially instruments and linked to computer
terminals to ensure ease of access and accuracy;
A1-18
c The monitoring system should be equipped with emergency power.

2) Monitoring parameters
The monitoring parameters are as follows: Flow, pressure, pressure difference,
water level, temperature, fluid quality, gas composition and so on.
(3) Thermal monitoring site requirement
1) The monitoring site should reflect operational condition parameters
correctly, regarding system running and processing equipment in order to ensure the
safety of cooling system operating.
2) The thermal parameters should be divided into key, important and general
levels according to importance. The key parameters related directly to the system
safety, and its monitoring site should have incident protection. The important
parameters should have out-of-limit alarm. The general parameters only need
continuous measurement.
3) For some important parameters, in order to improve reliability and
credibility of results, there should be both on-line and off-line monitoring to
cross-verify the results with each other;
4) The installation of monitoring site should meet the maintenance
requirements
5) For some important instrument, it is necessary to back-up means of
measuring for emergency use.
6) Monitoring systems should have the independent capability to mutually
cross-check in order to correctly ascertain operational conditions
(4) Thermal monitoring method
1) Online monitoring
The input parameters, such as flow, pressure, temperature, protective gas
pressure etc, use on-line monitoring. The logical relation of output parameters uses
programmable logic controllers (PLCS). The metastore for remote monitoring and
controlling data is stored in the combination control room of Target System and Beam
Instrument
2) Off-line monitoring
The water detecting instruments are situated in the water quality measurement
laboratory. In order to ensure the accuracy of heavy water quality monitoring, it is
necessary to use hand-samples and analyze the water-sample in laboratory to check
the results with on-line monitoring data. The off-line monitoring parameters are as
follows: radioactivity, heavy water electric conductivity, heavy water pH, protective
gas composition and heavy water quality etc.
(5) Thermal monitor parameter sites setting
A1-19
Table 2-4. Thermal-monitor parameter sites of heavy water system
Liquid
Flow Pressure
System Equipment Local Remote Alarm Thermometer level
meter gauge
meter
Pressure of supply tank √ √ √
Heavy water level of
√ √ √ √
supply tank
Inlet pressure of heat
√ √ √ √
exchanger
Inlet tempertuer of heat
√ √ √
exchanger
Flow of heat exchanger √ √ √
Outlet tempertuer of heat
√ √ √
exchanger
Temperature difference of
√ √ √ √
heat exchanger(heat side)
√ √ √ √
exchanger(heat side)
√ √
Flow of heat
√ √ √
Circulation
System Outlet tempertuer of heat
√ √
Temperature difference
between inlet and outlet
√ √ √ √
of heat exchanger(cold
side)
Inlet pressure of pump √ √ √
Outlet pressure of pump √ √ √ √
Inlet pressure of target √ √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of target √ √ √
Flow of target √ √ √ √
Outlet tempertuer of √ √
A1-20
target
Inlet pressure of reflector √ √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of
√ √ √
reflector
Flow of reflector √ √ √
Outlet tempertuer of
√ √
reflector
Pressure of storage tank √ √ √
Water level of storage
√ √ √ √
tank
Inlet pressure of system √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of
√ √ √
system
Purification Flow of system √ √ √
system
Outlet pressure of
√ √ √ √
exchange column
Outlet conductivity of
√ √
system
Pressure N2 of buffer tank √ √ √ √
Inlet N2 pressure of
√ √ √
storage tank
N2 flow of storage tank √ √ √
√ √ √
supply tank
N2 flow of supply tank √ √ √
Protective Flow of condenser

√ √ √
gas system (cooling water)
Inlet pressure of
√ √ √
condenser (cooling water)
Inlet tempertuer of
√ √ √ √
condenser (cooling water)
√ √ √ √
condenser(cooling water)
√ √ √ √
A1-21
of heat exchanger(cooling
water)
√ √
condenser(N2)
O2 containing √ √ √
D2 containing √ √ √
Total 30 41 25 15 2 8 14
A1-22
3 Light Water System

3.1 Introduction
The light-water systems can be divided into two separate cooling loops. The first
loop which cools the pre-moderator and the water-moderator and is referred to as
moderator cooling loop, which uses the parallel pipeline, and the flow and pressure is
adjusted by flow-control valves opening. Another one which cools the proton beam
window is called the proton beam window cooling loop, which uses a single
closed-pipeline. The flow diagram representing the primary components of light water
cooling loop is depicted in Fig.3-1 and Fig.3-2.
N2 Cylinder
vacuum supply
pump tank delay
Moderator tank
Condenser
delay
Vent stack Pre-moderator
tank
Plate heat Filter
exchanger
Ion-exchanger
Filter
column
Ion-exchanger
column
storage
tank
sewage
tank
Fig. 3-1. Moderator Coolant Flow Circuit
A1-23
N2 Cylinder
supply
vacuum
tank
pump
Proton beam delay

window tank
Condenser
Vent stack
Plate heat Filter
exchanger
Filter
Ion-exchanger Ion-exchanger
column column
storage
tank
sewage
tank
Fig. 3-2. Proton beam window Coolant Flow Circuit
3.2 SUB-SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

A similar design approach has been followed for the two cooling loops. Generic
design information is presented below to avoid repetition. As the two light water
systems have similar sub-system functions, the sections which are the same will be
introduced together and where the parts differ, they will be introduced separately.
3.2.1 Light water circulation System
The target station has water-moderator and pre-moderator, each of which

contains water. The heat deposited in the water of a water moderator or pre-moderator
is within the range of two to three kW.
The moderator cooling loop has two functions: The first function is the cooling
of the pre-moderator and water-moderator in order to control the temperature within
the regulated parameters. The second function is to slow down the fast neutrons in the
pre-moderator and water-moderator in order to satisfy experimental requirements.
The proton beam window cooling loop cools the proton beam window in order to
keep the temperature within the regulated scope exactly.
Demonized water for each light-water loop is supplied by one of two redundant
A1-24
pumps, which is constructed of corrosion-resistant materials; primarily standard

316SS.The pump draws water from supply tank. A drain tank acts as a holding bay for
the cooling.
The tanks, pumps and heat exchanger are housed on the service trolley. Supply
and return pipework between the cooling system components and the moderator is
constructed of standard 304SS.
The moderator cooling loop uses the one-closed circuit, adopting the parallel
pipeline and its flow is adjusted by a flow-control valve opening. A delay tank is set
up in every branch circuit to reduce the accumulation of radioactivity and lesson the
effect on the environment and relevant equipments. Based on periodic sample results,
cooling loop water can be periodically discharged to the sewage tank.
The heat load in the proton beam window is approximately 1.44 kW. The proton
beam window cooling loop includes a stainless-steel drain tank and has a working
pressure of 1bar, a stainless-steel supply tank, two redundant water pumps connected
in parallel, check valves to preclude reversed flows, a flow meter, filter, heat
exchanger and piping. A drain tank allows local holdup of the system water inventory.
Moderator cooling loop

(1) The heat load of pre-moderator 2.78 kW
(2) The heat load of water-moderator 2.23kW
(3) Moderator system operation pressure 1bar
(4) The inlet temperature of pre-moderator 25±1 °C
(5) The inlet temperature of moderator 25±0.3°C
(6) The outlet temperature of pre-moderator 27±1 °C
(7) The outlet temperature of moderator 26±0.3°C
(8) The flow rate of pre-moderator 20L/min
(9) The flow rate of moderator 32L/min
Proton beam window cooling loop
(1) The heat load of proton beam window 1.44kW
(2) Proton beam window system operation pressure 1bar
(3) The inlet temperature of proton beam window 25±1°C
(4) The outlet temperature of proton beam window 27±1°C
(5) The flow rate of proton beam window 10.36L/min
GB150-1998
3.2.1.4 Design requirements
(1)The system should have a well seal.
A1-25
(2)The water should be covered by a protective gas to ensure its purity of the
water.
(3)The system should be connected to the vacuum system.
(4)The light water cooling system should have adequate instruments to monitor
parameters, such as pressure, temperature and flow rate. In addition, there should be a
light-water leakage monitoring system
(5)The system should be equipped with sufficient valves to ensure effective
operation and maintenance of the system
(6)The connections between pipes should use welding. Whereas the connections
between pipes and equipment should be used flange
Light water in the supply tank enters the circulation system via the pump, after
cooling down the pre-moderator and water-moderator, subsequently gaining access to
the respective delay tank in the branch circuit staying for a while (90s). Then light
water flows into same pipeline and enters the heat exchanger in preparation for the
next recycle of cooling.
When the system starts to operate, pump pumps light water out of the drain tank
and into the circulation supply tank and pipeline system. When it is under
maintenance or any other special cases that operation must be stopped, the light water
in the system is drawn back into the drain tank by means of gravity and vacuum. The
light water in the drain tank has three treatment ways: First, where the water radiation
level is low, it can be safely reused for the next running cycle. Second, where the
radiation dose is high, it will be treated as radioactive waste, and will be treated
accordingly. A third method is to treat the water as (non-toxic) waste and to discharge
it safely into the drainage system
In normal operation, the drain tank serves as a backup for water supply when
light water losses are caused by evaporation or leaky pipe-work. The function of the
delay tank is to prolong the staying time to allow for a decrease in radioactivity and to
lower the radiation level of rays and neutrons. The heat exchanger adopts the Plate
Heat Exchanger. The flow chart is as follows in Fig3-3 and Fig3-4.
Supply
tank
delay
Moderator tank
delay
Pre-moderator tank
Plate heat Pump
exchanger
Fig. 3-3. Moderator light water circulation system
A1-26
supply
tank
Proton beam delay

window tank
Plate heat Pump

exchanger
Fig. 3-4. Proton beam window light water circulation system
3.2.2 Purification system
The light water system will produce some active products with neutron and
proton irradiation. At the same time, the corroded pipes and the bodies of system will
also produce some pollution that can deteriorate the quality of water and affect the
normal operation of the system.
As the role and operation modes of the two water purification systems is the
same, the light water purification system will be introduced together as one entity in
order to avoid repetition.
(1) System design pressure 1bar

(2) System design temperature 27±1℃
(3) Flow of moderator cooling loop undefined
(4) Flow of proton beam window cooling loop undefined
(5) Light water quality
Table3-1 Light water quality
Resistivity(Mohm-cm) PH suspend solid mg/L Cl- F- Cu2+

mg/L mg/L mg/L
≥1.5 Undefined ≤5.0 ≤0.1 ≤0.1 ≤0.05
GB150-1998
A1-27
(1) The outer layer of the resin tank uses a radiation prevention seal.
(2) When the resin ion-exchange-rate lower than the accepted rate, the resin
will not be removed usefully from the ion-exchange column, the ion-exchange
column is treated as a radioactive waste
(3) The purification system’s light-water quality should be meet the water
quality requirements
Figure 3-5 shows the light water purification system. The major processes is as
follows: an amount of the circulating water flow is discharged from the delayed
tank outlet of the light water cooling system, firstly passing through a mechanical
filter to remove insoluble impurities; then after passing through two exchange
columns, which can be used in series or parallel, ionized impurities and small
amounts of solid particles and colloids in the light water can be removed; after that,
fragmented resins in the light water can be intercepted via a filter, and lastly, the
treated light water returns to the pump inlet. The purification system operates with
the operating of the water cooling system, and the power of the circulation system is
supplied to the purification system, so that there is no need for an increase in the
number of extra power plants.
From delay
To pump tank outlet
inlet
Filter
Filter Ion-exchange
column Ion-exchange
column
Fig.3-5 Light water purification system
3.2.3 Protective gas system
When the system is running, light water is activated by neutron and proton
irradiation, some of the light water will be decomposed into explosive gas such as H2
and O2. The protective gas system is used to cover the light-water, its main function
being to filter out explosive gas, minimize the air activation and to maintain the
system operating pressure to achieve smooth operation of the light-water system
A1-28
The moderator system and proton beam window system have protective gas
system separately and the two sets of protective gas systems design idea exactly the
same.
Protective gas is used with the operation of the system and exhausted to the
off-gas tunnel; in downtime or special circumstances, using vacuum pumps to draw
protective gas out of the pipeline to the off-gas tunnel.
(1) Gas chamber total volume <1 m3

(2) Decomposition rate <1 %/day
(3) System operating temperature <50oC
(4) System operating pressure 0.4 bar
(5) Protective gas quality
Table 3-2 protective gas composition target

Item Value
N2 concentration ≥97%
H2 concentration
≤3%
O2 concentration
GB150-1998
(1) Isolation of light water to ensure the quality of light water.

(2) Filter out the radioactive gasses in a timely manner
(3) The system is to be equipped with vacuum pumping lines which are
used to allow the operation of the system vacuum.
(4) The system should have enough instruments to monitor the run-time
pressure.
(5) The system should be equipped with sufficient valves to ensure the
effective operation of the system and water vapor recovery after condensation.
This system equipped with a condenser, a waste water system and other devices
operate as follows: Protective gas of drain tank and supply tank goes through the
condenser to condense. Draining condensate from off-gas lines to sewage collector
will be provided. Protective gas can be discharged directly using ventilation system
hoses. The main system of protective gas flow is in Fig3-6.
A1-29
According to SNS and the Advanced Research Reactor (CARR) operation

experience, the protective gas can either be helium or nitrogen. As nitrogen more
expensive than helium, after comprehensive comparison of two types of protective
gas, we choose N2 gas as protective gas.
N2
Cylinder
Supply
tank
Vent stack
sewage
tank
storage
tank
Fig.3-6 Protective gas system
3.2.4 Vacuum system

The vacuum system has numerous purposes. Firstly, the vacuum systems are used
to remove air prior to backfilling with water and protective gas to keep the pure degree
to ensure the appropriate degree of purity is maintained. Secondly, the vacuum systems
are used to collect residual water before maintenance during downtime. Thirdly, the
vacuum systems are used to check that the connection seals between pipes and
equipments are airtight
Prior to commencing system operation, and in order to ensure water purity and
operational safety, the entire system (water drain tank, pipelines and cooling flow
channel) are vacuumed, before filling with the protective gas and de-ionized water.
Should there be the need to stop running in exceptional circumstances or for the
purpose of maintenance. The pipeline system should be vacuumed and light water
should be returned to the drain tank before operation. The wastewater should be
collected and discharged together into the sewage system
(1) Working temperature 0～50oC

(2) Vacuum requirement 0.01-0.1 Torr
A1-30
(3) The total capacity of cooling loop 4m3
GB150-1998
(1) Drawing out the air from the system in a timely manner and and
providing the required vacuum feature.
(2) This system should collect the water steam along with the pumped gas.
(3) The air that this system draws out should pass emission safety standards.
(4) The system design should have enough instruments for monitoring
purpose.
(5) The system should have enough valve doors to ensure that the system
works effectively.
The vacuum system’s main process is as follows: The air that is taken out from
the water cooling system, etc. is condensed from its water form via the congealed
condensing machine, and is then ventilated safely via the vacuum pump. The process
is shown in figure 3-7.
Supply
tank
Vent stack
sewage
tank storage
tank
Fig. 3-7. Vacuum system
A1-31
3.2.5 Monitoring and control system
3.2.5.1 Control system
(1) Control requirements and Control function

1 ) A safe and stable system
Because the light water system is running in the radioactive environment, a
request is totally enclosed operation, the security of the system is higher, we prevent
light water from leakage and other accidents; it is important to improve the remote
monitoring, interlock protection and event alarm to ensure the safe operation of the
system.
2) Automatic control and manual control
The system working in normal operation conditions, generally runs automatically.
PLC central controller will automatically adjust the control parameters to achieve the
purpose of stable operation; in case of failure or emergency events, you can switch to
manual control mode. According to operation experience or emergency events
approach, manual control field devices, to be a relatively stable operating state, to
protect system security continue to work. There are automatic and manual modes for
valves control, remote monitoring and local control can adjust the valve opening.
3) Closed loop control
Automatic control system with closed-loop control can adjust control parameters
in real-time, to guarantee stable operation of the system. The heat of the control
objects generated by the neutron impact at different times is not a constant, so the heat
taken away by light water is different. Control parameters could maintain in the
vicinity of the given value by closed loop control for the purpose of stable operation.
4 ) Control precision
When the heat load of the control objects is changing at any time, the
temperature is changing. According to the control objects material properties and the
demand of the cooling water system, control parameters just can be adjusted in small
range, so the system requires control precision to satisfy control demand, usually
continuous regulation of light water and fast control can meet the requirement of
control precision.
5 ) Multi-running mode
Light water system consists of light water circulation system, water purification
system, protection gas system, vacuum system. Each subsystem has different
functions at different running mode; multi-running mode can achieve different
functions, implementing the ultimate goal that taking away the heat quantity of the
control objects for safe and stable operation.
6 ) Remote monitoring and local control
Remote monitoring of field devices has been widely applied in industry control,
technology maturity and advantages of remote monitoring are apparent; the central
controller gets the information of parameters of light water system from field devices
and sensors, and then transforms the data to data server and remote monitor by
A1-32
industry Ethernet. Operator can monitor and control the field devices in the central
control room. When some emergency events happen, we can deal with it as soon as
possible to avoid serious accident. Local control is necessary for the system; it is a
part of the system, in case of some unexpected events happen, including the
breakdown of the control network and so on. Local control can achieve the control
task, such as control operating, system debug, monitor device state and so on.
7 ) Data acquisition and data storage
The central controller gets important parameter data of light water system from
sensors and devices, and then it is sent to the data server and stored in the database; it
is the remote monitoring data source. We can get the historical data and real-time data,
from the database for monitoring and data analysis. It is helpful for daily operation of
system, because we get the whole information of system. Especially when some fault
happens, historical data can provide accurate information to find out why it happens,
and deal with the problem as soon as possible accurately. Also data is important
experience which will be used for system design and system optimization in the
future.
8 ) Event alarm
Faults often can not be expected, perfect event alarm plays an important part in
the system. Operators working in the control room though remote monitoring can
obtain all of the event alarm information such as voice alarm, light alarm, software
hints, when accidents happened. Operator can make a quick operating to deal with the
accidents. The event accident will be recorded in the database for analyzing accidents.
9) Signal interlocking
Light water system is an important part of the spallation neutron source; so it's
important to ensure that light water system is running safely and stably. Light water
system has much relationship with other systems; they are restricted by each other,
and require real-time react when other systems accidents occur. There are two kinds
of signal interlocking. One is restricting other system, for example, before light water
start working, the proton beam is forbidden to impact target; another one is restricted
by other systems, for example, when the proton beam is working, shutdown light
water system is forbidden. Signal interlocking can deal with emergency accidents in a
short time automatically to ensure the system is safe
(2) Control method
Light water cooling system is a typical water circulation system, its main
function is to take away the heat of control object, it is similar to the central
air-conditioning system, due to the particularity of light water system, it requires
higher safe level, especially about devices and instrument, but their operational
principle and control method are the same. According to the thermodynamics
equation Q =cm∆t , so m ∝ Q , the heat quantity is proportional to water flow. We
assume that the inlet water temperature is constant, so when we adjust the water flow,
the outlet water temperature changes, the heat quantity is transformed by the water
flow. This is the variable flow control method which is widely used in the water
cooling system and central air conditioning system.
A1-33
Variable flow control means the water flow in the main water circulation is
variable. In the development history of variable flow control, the earlier system
usually used two-way valve to adjust water flow. there are some faults about this
method, such as adjusting range is small, the water pressure in the pipe changes too
much and too fast, it will brought out other problems making system unstable. And
then the water system used three-way valve to adjust water flow, there are some
advantages compared to the old system, for example, there are wide adjusting range.
But problem still exists, like that wasting energy and balancing pipe pressure and so
on.
As the development of inverter technology, the inverter price is going down and
performance is improving. Therefore the inverter is widely applied in industry control.
Variable flow control can use inverter to vary the motor speed to change the water
flow, implementing stepless speed adjusting. It is the high stage of variable control to
use inverter in the water cooling system, its advantages are apparent, for example, the
system structure is simple and reliable, control logic and method is easy, the water
flow can be adjusted continuously making system stable and safe, it must be a
energy-saving system.
Variable flow control will be applied in the light water cooling system, inlet
water temperature and outlet water temperature will be the control parameter in the
closed loop control system.
Inlet water temperature is adjusted by the heat exchanger. The water flow going
through the heat exchanger affects the inlet temperature of light water, when the water
flow is going up; the inlet temperature is going down. Therefore, they make up of a
closed loop control system to control the inlet water temperature in a normal
temperature. The control structure is shown in figure3-8.
Electric Water Inlet

T2 △T2 current Voltage Heavy Heat temperature
flow
PLC Inverter
+
_ water pump exchanger
T`2
Fig. 3-8. diagram of inlet water temperature closed loop control structure
Due to the inlet water control, it will stay in a normal range, so the heat quantity
is reflected by the outlet water temperature, when the heat quantity rises, the outlet
water temperature is going up. As a result, outlet water temperature can be the control
parameter to control the water flow to take away the heat quantity of control objects.
This is a closed loop control for light water circulation. The control structure is shown
in figure3-9.
T0 △T0 current Voltage Heavy Control temperature
flow
PLC Inverter
+
_ water pump object
T`0
Fig. 3-9. diagram of light water control object closed loop control structure
A1-34
Water purification system is an important part of light water cooling system; it

takes a task that purifying the light water to meet the requirement of light water purity.
According to the present design parameters, it requires 10% of main circulation light
water flow to meet system requirement. The water flow going through the water
purification system is adjusted by the valve, and is proportional to main circulation
water flow, so the water flow can be the control parameter to adjust the purification
system water flow. The control structure is shown in figure 3-10.
Electric Inlet water

L0 △L0 current flow
+
PLC Valve
_
L`0
Fig 3-10 diagram of water purification closed loop control structure
There are lots of valves to control the pipeline on or off in the system. Valves are
installed between two pipelines, there are two kinds of valves, one is switch style,
means only opening or closing; another one is continuous style, can be operated by
percentage. All of the valves can be operated through local control or remote control
by manual.
(3) Control logic.
According to the three closed loop control system above, they make a control
logic, which is shown in figure 3-11.
Start
Initialization
Read control parameters
Y Control object
temperature high
N
Control object Y
Add frequency Reduce frequency
temperature low
Y Purification water flow

much
N
Increase valve Purification water flow Y Decrease valve

opening little opening
N
Fig. 3-11. diagram of control logic
(4) Control system hardware structure

The hardware structure of control system is shown in figure 3-12; it consists of
A1-35
remote monitoring device and local control device, to implement control function and
satisfy control requirement.
Local control devices include central controller, inverters, light water pumps,
valves, control panel and various sensors. The main function of sensors is to get the
information of various parameters, and transferred to central controller by electric
signal. Due to the sensors signal, central controller sends the control signal to control
device such as valves and inverters, it makes up of a closed loop system. All of the
valves and parameter setting can be operated with control panel which is an important
part of local control device and is the interface between local device and operators.
The local control instrument is good for debug and operation of system. When the
remote monitoring is out of control for network fault, local control will plays an
important part of control.
Remote monitoring devices include data server, management server, web server,
client PC. Remote monitoring devices are connected to local control devices by
industry Ethernet. Data server communicate with PLC in real-time, and obtain the
latest data continuously, which will be saved in the database. Manage server takes
charge of the client PC logging on manage server for remote monitoring. Client PC
can monitor the system and send an operation control signal to PLC if necessary. Web
server provide web service for outside authorized client to access server though
internet
Fig. 3-12. diagram of control system hardware structure
(5) Control system software structure

The control system software structure is shown in figure 3-13; including PLC
control software, control panel software and remote monitoring software.
PLC control software is the core of the whole software structure. It is the most
basic software, used to get the sensors data and device state and control local device.
Therefore, the software takes charge of controlling the local I/O device, adjusting
valves, controlling inverters, get data from various sensors and devices state.
Control panel software works for local control. Control panel communicate with
PLC and achieve data exchange, the software embedding control panel can access the
A1-36
registers of PLC to achieve the parameters set and control function,

Remote monitoring software is an important part of software structure, which
plays an important part in daily operation. It contains data service software,
management software and web software. Generally speaking, data server get data
from PLC by industry Ethernet, saved in the database, Implementing data acquisition
and data storage. The client PC can use management software to log on management
server to access the data and monitor the operation of system. The outside client can
view the status of system though web server by internet, Remote monitoring software
implements remote control function, including data acquisition, data storage, events
alarm, parameters setting, data display, data analysis, access control, remote control,
web service and so on.
Web server
Control panel
C
d
ev
ru
Software function
spi
C
no
ep
o
lo
no
ar
Software function
it
rt
D
lp
d
ya
a
si
at
m
P
gn
re
te
a
es
ar
tit
m
A
a
ec
c
ss
rm
E
tn
ev
a
al
W
m
go
be
P
lp
d
ni
l
ya
re
te
a
ar
si
D
iv
tea
ec
e
ts
Data server
D
Software
no
iu
qc
a
a
is
function
it
at
D
eg
a
s
ar
ot
at
Data base
PLC control program
Management server
C
po
lo
no
rt
D
ln
ez
ya
a
a
at
m Software function
P
re
te
a
ar
C
lp
d
ev
ru
ya
si
D
lp
d
Control object Sensor

ya
taa
si
m
A
a
ec
c
ssm
E
tn
ev
ra
la
Fig. 3-13. diagram of control system software structure
3.2.5.1 Monitoring system
(1) Introduction
The light-water systems can be divided into two sets of monitoring systems for
moderator cooling system and proton beam window cooling system separately.
Through the monitoring of these parameters，the light water system’s operating status
can be reflected effectively. When the system is functioning abnormally according to
parameter values, it should adjust these operational parameters automatically and
immediately.
The monitoring parameters, equipment and method of the light water system are
A1-37
the same as those for the heavy water system. The general specifications of the
pipeline and valves of the light water system can be slightly lower than those of the
heavy water system.
The monitoring system shows the parameters of operation [such as system
condition and activity] and gets the data of thermal instruments through computer.
When the thermal parameters go beyond the normal operation value, it is necessary to
immediately send an alarm signal via the alarm system to warn the operators to take
effective measures. If the thermal parameters go beyond normal operational levels, the
alarm system will immediately sound so that the operators can take effective measures.
If key thermal parameters go beyond permitted safety levels, the accident protection
system will immediately stop the spallation reaction.
(2) Design requirement
1) The thermal parameter monitoring-system requirement.
a Measuring accurately, respond intelligently, and be convenient to
maintain.
b Adoption of standard, serialized instruments and linked with computer.
c The monitoring system should be equipped with emergency power.
2) Monitoring parameter
The parameters of the following components are monitored: Flow, pressure,
pressure difference, water level, temperature, fluid quality, gas composition and so on.
The water quality standard shall be maintained as specified in the 3.2.2.1 parameters.
(3) Thermal monitoring site requirements
1) The monitoring site should reflect the operational parameters correctly of
both the up-and-running system as well as the processing equipment in order to ensure
the safe functioning of the cooling system.
2) The thermal parameters should be divided into key, important and general
levels according to importance. The key parameters related directly to the system
safety, and its monitoring site should have incident protection. The important
parameters should have out-of-limit alarm. The general parameters only need
continuous measurement.
3) For certain important parameters both on- and off-line monitoring systems
should be in place in order for mutual cross-checking to be carried out, and for the
purposes of reliability and credibility;
4) The installation of monitoring site should meet the maintenance
requirements
5) For some important instruments, it is necessary to back-up means of
measuring for emergency use.
6) Monitoring systems should have the independent capability to mutually
cross-check in order to correctly ascertain operational conditions.
(4) Thermal monitoring method
1) On-line monitoring
The input parameters, such as flow, pressure, temperature, protective gas
pressure etc, use on-line monitoring. The logical relation of output parameters uses
programmable logic controllers (PLCS). The metastore for remote monitoring and
A1-38
control data are situated in the combination control room of Target System and Beam
Instrument
2) Off-line monitoring
The water detecting instruments are set in the water quality measurement
laboratory. In order to ensure the accuracy of water quality monitoring, it is necessary
to use a hand-sample and to analyze it in the laboratory to cross-check the results with
on-line monitoring data. The off-line monitoring parameters are as follows:
radioactivity, electric conductivity, pH, protective gas composition and water quality
etc.
(5) Thermal monitor parameter sites setting
Table3-3 Thermal-monitor parameter sites of moderator cooling loop
Liquid
Flow pressure
meter gauge
meter
Water level of supply tank √ √ √ √
√ √ √ √
exchanger
√ √ √
exchanger
Flow of heat exchanger √ √ √
√ √ √
exchanger
Temperature difference of
Circulation √ √ √ √
heat exchanger(heat side)
System
√ √ √ √
√ √
Flow of heat exchanger(heat
√ √ √
side)
√ √
between inlet and outlet of √ √ √ √
heat exchanger(cold side)
A1-39

Outlet pressure of pump √ √ √ √
Inlet pressure of moderator √ √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of moderator √ √ √
Flow of moderator √ √ √ √
√ √
moderator
Inlet pressure of pre-
√ √ √ √
moderator
Inlet tempertuer of pre-
√ √ √
moderator
Flow of pre- moderator √ √ √
Outlet tempertuer of pre-
√ √
moderator
Water level of storage tank √ √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of system √ √ √
Purification Flow of system √ √ √
system
Outlet pressure of exchange
√ √ √ √
column
Outlet conductivity of system √ √
Pressure N2 of buffer tank √ √ √ √
Inlet N2 pressure of storage
√ √ √
tank
Inlet N2 pressure of supply
Protective √ √ √
tank
gas system
Flow of condenser (cooling
√ √ √
water)
Inlet pressure of condenser
√ √ √
(cooling water)
A1-40
Inlet tempertuer of condenser

√ √ √ √
(cooling water)
√ √ √ √
condenser(cooling water)
between inlet and outlet of
√ √ √ √
heat exchanger(cooling
water)
√ √
condenser(N2)
H2 containing √ √ √
Total 30 41 25 15 2 8 14
Table3-4 Thermal-monitor parameter sites of proton beam window cooling loop
Liquid
Flow pressure
meter gauge
meter
Water level of supply
√ √ √ √
tank
√ √ √ √
exchanger
√ √ √
exchanger
Circulation Flow of heat exchanger √ √ √
System
√ √ √
heat exchanger
of heat exchanger(heat √ √ √ √
side)
√ √ √ √
Inlet tempertuer of heat √ √
A1-41
Flow of heat
√ √ √
heat exchanger(heat √ √
side)
√ √ √ √
of heat exchanger(cold
side)
Outlet pressure of
√ √ √ √
pump
Inlet pressure of proton
√ √ √ √
beam window
Inlet tempertuer of
√ √ √
proton beam window
Flow of proton beam
√ √ √ √
window
√ √
proton beam window
Inlet pressure of pre-
√ √ √ √
moderator
Inlet tempertuer of pre-
√ √ √
moderator
Flow of pre- moderator √ √ √
√ √
pre- moderator
Water level of storage
√ √ √ √
tank
Inlet tempertuer of
Purification system √ √ √
system
Flow of system √ √ √
Outlet pressure of √ √ √ √
A1-42
exchange column
Outlet conductivity of
√ √
system
Pressure N2 of buffer
√ √ √ √
tank
√ √ √
storage tank
√ √ √
supply tank
Flow of condenser
√ √ √
(cooling water)
Inlet pressure of
condenser (cooling √ √ √
water)
Protective
Inlet tempertuer of
gas system
condenser (cooling √ √ √ √
water)
condenser(cooling √ √ √ √
water)
of heat √ √ √ √
exchanger(cooling
water)
√ √
condenser(N2)
H2 containing √ √ √
Total 28 36 23 13 2 7 13
A1-43
Appendix 2
Design Criteria Document for

CSNS TS&NI
Binyun Zhang, Email: zhangby@ihep.ac.cn

Jianfei Tong, Email: tongjf@ihep.ac.cn
CSNS utility system group

Utility system of CSNS TS & NI

1.1 Introduction
The utility system of target station and instrument hall includes cooling system,
power supply system and building implements.
(1) Cooling System
The cooling system will supply and control the distribution of cooling medium to
remove the heat deposition in the target station with promoted proton beam power
equals 200Kw. The de-ionized, light water will remove proton beam window, steel
reflector, pre-moderators and the ambient composite, and heavy water will be used for
cooling tungsten target and beryllium reflector.
The function of cooling system includes:
[1] cooling target (heavy water, high radioactivity)
[2] cooling beryllium and steel reflectors (heavy water, high radioactivity)
[3] cooling proton beam window (light water, high radioactivity).
[4] cooling pre-moderators, ambient composite, helium vessel, shield on the
trolley (light water, high radioactivity).
[5] cooling shielding and shutters (dry air, low radioactivity).
[6] cooling T0 choppers (light water, radioactivity).
[7] providing the interface to secondary cooling system.
The auxiliary systems of cooling system include:
[1] heavy water purification system, deionization system, supply system, recycle
system.
[2] purity water supply system
[3] light water purification system, deionization system, supply system.
[4] waste water and gas analysis systems
[5] helium gas supply system
[6] nitrogen gas supply system
(2) Power Supply system
380V transformed from 110kV in the CSNS electric power substation will be
provided for the power supply of target station and instrument halls. Considering the
special needs and safety, additional UPS will be set for some equipment.
1) Distribution board
2) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS）
3) Emergency power supply (EPS)
(3) Building Equipment
The convenience, comfort, and safety shall be considered for the building design
and its equipment design. Controlled zones shall prevent diffusion of positioned gas to
uncontrolled areas, and the ventilation of those zones should be kept in ducts to stack,
and the effluence from it. Ventilation and air-conditioning system and sewage
discharge system shall be designed to prevent the radioactive materials from taking to
uncontrolled zone.
A2-1
The controlled zone shall be designed to keep the negative pressure, and prevent
the release of radioactive material when leak accident happens. The negative pressure
in different level controlled zones shall be adjusted by dampers, and overpressure or
vacuum conditions will be prevented out limited. Off-gas from service area shall be
exhausted to stack, while radioactive air from target station and hot-cell shall be
exhausted to RTBT tunnel. Air-conditioning system shall keep temperature and insure
electronic devices work steady.
The sewage from target station, hot-cell and service room shall consider the way
to collect and discharge.
[1] Ventilation and air condition system
[2] Pressurize air supply system
[3] Water supply and drainage system
[4] Control panel
1.2 Cooling system
1.2.1 Introduction
Heavy water, light water and air are cooling mediums to remove the heat after
spallation reaction. Air and light water is radioactive from passing target, reflectors in
the target station and hot-cell. Radiation protection in service area for primary cooling
equipment, especially delay tank and resin tank, shall be taken into consideration.
1.2.2 Safety design criteria of cooling system
(1) Cooling system of target, beryllium reflector and steel reflector

This cooling system is used to remove the heat of target and beryllium reflector.
According to neutronic performance, heavy water shall be used to increase neutron
flux. Impurity levels shall not exceed to10 wt%. The high water is suffered high
radiation.
(2) Target service trolley, proton beam window and helium vessel cooling system
This system will remove the heat generated from helium vessel, shield and
proton beam window. The shield and helium vessel are in front side of the target
trolley, The cooling medium is light water. The cooling water is high irradiated.
(3) Pre-moderator, water moderator cooling system
This system will remove the heat generated in pre-moderator, water moderator,
which are slowing down fast neutron. The cooling medium is light water. The cooling
water is high irradiated.
(4) Shield cooling system
This system will remove the heat generated in the shield around the helium
vessel and shutters. The cooling medium is dry air. The cooling air is high irradiated.
(Interface with the utility system).
(5) T0 choppers cooling system
A2-2
This system will remove the heat mainly generated by friction when the T0
choppers rotating. The cooling medium is light water. The cooling light water is high
irradiated.
(6) Neutron experimental device cooling water supply system
Cooling water is supplied for the neutron experimental device in the instrument
hall Ⅰand second instrument hall Ⅱ, but a small part of cooling water is supplied to
the extreme low temperature hydrogen circulation system. The cooling medium is
light water. The cooling water is not irradiated.
1.2.3 Secondary cooling system

Secondary cooling system removes heat of primary cooling system with heat
exchanger. (Interface with the utility system)
1.2.4 Primary cooling auxiliary system

Primary cooling auxiliary system can keep the cooling system work more steady
and extend life-span. Heavy water cooling system shall be compact with short
circulation pipe to reduce the costs of heavy water.
Heavy water for cooling beryllium reflector do not need high isotopic purity, no
less than 90% is required. Heavy water will not need to remove protium treated with
deionizer resin. Fresh heavy water with higher concentration will be added to
maintain the concentration of used heavy water in demanded.
According to SNS report, Aluminum components contacted with light water will
need to maintain the PH of light water as close to 5.5 for corrosion control. The ion
exchange resin will be set to vary the PH in all water loops.
Water resistivity shall be maintained at a value great than 1.5 Mohm-cm in all
cooling loops. Ions generated by spallation and corrosion need to be removed in
cooling loops.
Heavy water holding tank is set in basement and reserve transport connector.
Bump pressurize heavy water to fill the target, beryllium reflector after the pipe and
vessel are vacuumized with vacuum air pump. When beam on, the vaporization
temperature of cooling water shall be increase with bump and booster pump.
To reduce corrosion, disintegration and other impurity, purification system shall
be design to suitable purification cycle period to keep the water quality in limit.
Furthermore, solid impurity shall be removed from cooling water loop.
In heavy water system, nitrogen as protection gas shall cover heavy water in tank
to protect the heavy water quality. The exhaust of nitrogen shall remove the
radioactive species, after multiple filtration the nitrogen can be exhaust to stack.
Vacuum system for evacuating the heavy water cooling loops after the loops
have been opened to the atmosphere shall provide a rough vacuum again. Provisions
shall be made to remove water from the components while preventing condensable
form being drawn into vacuum pump.
Supervisory control and data acquisition system provides mass flow rate,
A2-3
pressure, temperature, and water quality and so on to control room. Remote

monitoring, remote controlling and remote data saving shall be operated in main
control room. A liquid level sensor shall be set in the water storage tank.
Light water cooling auxiliary system consists of purification system, gas
protection system, vacuum system, monitor system.
1.2.4 Deionized water supply system

Deionized water is supplied to the safety hull / reflector cooling system, the
target trolley / helium vessel cooling system, the proton beam window / light water
pre-moderator cooling system, T0 chopper cooling system, neutron experimental
device cooling water supply system, the secondary cooling system and a gas waste
processing system.
This system is composed of the ion exchange resin cartridge and the filter to
keep the water quality, the flow separation header, the flow meter, the degas device,
and so on. The water quality meter should be set at the exit of this system insure the
quality.
1.2.5 Helium gas supply system

Helium gas supply system supplies the helium gas for the helium vessel to
provide helium environment. Helium gas also prevent the leakage of H2 with
additional helium layer around H2 transport line. Helium gas is supplied to the
systems to keep constant pressure followed by system specifications. Helium gas
supply system is composed of the pressure control valves, remote control breather
valves, flow meter and etc. The system has vacuum pump to conduct vacuum purge
for the connected components. The waste Helium should be vented to stack.
1.2.6 Waste water and gas analysis system

The water and gas in target station or other active area are irradiated when beam
on, especially in helium vessel and work as protection gas.
The water of primary cooling system in service area through reflector, helium
vessel, proton beam window and re-moderator cooling system are relatively high
irradiated. Before draining, the water should be analyzed to prevent radiation
diffusing.
Cover gas of primary cooling system and helium in helium vessel are necessary
to measure the irradiated level before venting to met the requirements gas emission
standard.
1.2.7 Normal Criteria

The specification of the cooling system is shown in the following. Note: all
systems are designed to decrease leakage of the radioactive substance as much as
A2-4
possible.
(1) Vessel and Tanks
1) The material used for the vessel should have the ability of resistance to
corrosion of no less than the stainless steel 304 equivalent.
2) The vessels or tanks, which involved radioactive substance or likely to be
involved, should be formed with welding structure and cylindrical shape. The welding
section can be confirmed by the visual observation or confirmed leakage by other
methods.
3) Considering the long-term use (more than thirty years), as a corrosion fee,
wall thickness with more than 1.5mm is secured.
4) About the fixation of the containers, considered earthquake-proof is 2.5G.
5) The tanks should be designed to drain almost water inside.
6) As for the decay tank, internal structure (baffle board and so on) should be
devised to take off or recirculation, and the most import is to ensure the necessary
time to decay short-time radioactive to be guaranteed.
(2) Pump
1) The pumps for the transportation and circulation of the primary cooling
system are a self-water-inject type canned pump as prefer.
2) The heavy water pumps of primary cooling system are installed on a leakage
liquid accept saucer (catch pan) to prevent the leakage caused by expansion which can
be detected with a resistance line and so on. Pumps of primary cooling system should
consider backup especially for cooling target.
(3) Heat Exchanger
1) The heat exchanger used for the primary water cooling system is the all
welded plate type heat exchanger as principle. Multiple pipe heat exchangers are used
for air cooling system in principle.
2) The leakage liquid accept saucer shall be installed under the heat exchanger,
which is used for the primary water cooling system of the high radioactivity, and it
can detect leakage.
(4) Pipe and Valve
1) All pipes, which involve high radioactive substance, shall be fabricated from
seamless pipes.
2) All remote control valves, which attach high radioactive substance, shall use
air-operating type. The valves installed in main piping of the primary water cooling
system shall install metal bellow seal type valves.
3) Connection of the piping must be welded in principle, while connections
between pipes and facilities are flanges.
4) The velocity of liquid in pipes should be less than 2.5 m/s to prevent
fluid-induced vibration and cavitation. The maximum velocity on tungsten shall be
less than 4m/s to reduce the corrosion and scour of tungsten. Gas velocity in pipes
should be less than 10 m/s.
5) In all systems, the components contacted with liquid or gas shall be fabricated
from the stainless steel 304 or equivalent material.
6)All the air operation values should close normally, and operating pressure shall
A2-5
be less than 0.5 MPa.G.

7) The open rate of the air-operating valve can be adjusted remotely by operating
on indicators on the control panel in control room.
(5) Measuring Instrument
1) Thermometer shall be K-type sheathed thermocouple and precision degree
shall be class-1, safety degree shall be RE, defended intensity shall be 7 degrees. The
sheath material is NCF600 or stainless steel 316 equivalents. The compensate cable
should prevent from electromagnetic shield. Double element type should be used. And
it can be switched to another one, when the used one is failure.
2) An orifice-type or other pressure difference sensing type shall be adopted for
the flow meter of the liquid region.
3) Sensors shall be prohibited installed in the position of the electric leakage,
pressurized air leakage and water leakage.
4) The leakage detection vessel of liquid shall use resistance detection type.
(6) Common equipment
The requirement of water and compressed air will be used as follows
1)Industrial water
P.H . : 5.8~8.7
Turbidity : less than 15
Temperature : less than 30℃
Pressure : About 0.3 MPa (0.2~0.4 MPa)
These qualities are based on Songshan lake industrial water service regulations.
2)Compressed air
Supply pressure : 0.6±0.1MPa
Dew point : less than 10℃ (under pressurized condition)
Filter : less than 0.01 mm
1.2.8 Control console

(1) The general operator console installed in the main control room can observe
and operate all the systems in the target station. When changed to local mode,
independent operation, if necessary, can be conducted by the local control panel of
each system.
(2) When beam on, operator can be confirming the operation step-by-step
interactively by the man-machine interface.
(3) The fundamental measurement points of each cooling water system are flow
rate, pressure, temperature etc, and those parameters shall be transported to control
panel both in main control room. The water resistivity, PH value shall be kept to
control the corrosion.
(4) When the low flow rate of cooling water, low pressure, pump stop and
leakage happens and be detected, the alarm signal occurs and transmitted by using
PLC network. Moreover, the alarm signal duplicate and change to two contact point
signals, contact point module signal of the PLC and contact signal of the metal wiring
A2-6
system, which is independent from the PLC. And these two signals are transmitted to
main control room, and connected to the indicated panel and accelerator interlock
system.
(5) When out of power supply, UPS will recover to make the systems halt safely.
1.3 Power supply system
1.3.1 Introduction
Fig. 1.3.1. Power supply system
The electric room target station and instrument halls is in the non-control zone,
and this system accepts 380 V power supply from the 110kV special high voltage
substation. This system transforms in the voltage corresponding to the load of several
systems according the load. The electrical systems shall be designed so that all
components operate within the capacities for initial and projected load. UPS is
connected to some systems, which needs stable power supply when the voltage
changes in a moment or damage may happens when out of power. Moreover,
independent UPS is installed to supply the PPS (Personal Protection System)
equipment concerned with radiation safety, and PPS is independent to other
equipment. The dedicated power supply circuit is installed to avoid high frequency
electric noise for higher precise experimental measurement. The composition of
electric supply power system is shown in Figure 1.3.1
A2-7
1.3.2 Common Demand
(1) Earthquake-proof design

Design horizontal seismic intensity NA
(2) Cable specifications
Cable passed the test of inclination test, and when it’s burned it does not generate
the Dioxin and Halogen gas. Then, the cable is designed with careful consideration for
the fireproof countermeasure.
(3) Earth system circuit
This system is classified in the general (commercial) purpose circuit and the
dedicated for the experimental device circuit with a purpose of avoiding high
frequency noise. General purpose circuit and the experimental device circuit are the
separated systems which consist of independent earth electrode and bus line,
respectively.
(4) The penetration management of the area boundary
The cable penetration parts of the wall or the floor are done the legal fireproof
division preparation. As for the part where is demanded airtight, airtight preparation is
done in addition. Moreover, the parts where need the shielding effect are penetrated
by using concealed pipes of the curve form.
1.3.3 Power supply system
(1) The general (commercial) circuit

The system doesn’t have a backup by the spare power supply at the above system
is black out., and doesn’t connect to the UPS, experimental device and PPS circuit.
(2) UPS circuit
The system shall be supported without a momentum interruption even if general
circuit interruption by the storage battery of the UPS in the electric room. Because the
UPS itself is a generator load, it is fed continuously without a momentum cut off by
the switched from the battery circuit to the generator circuit after starting the re-feed
by the generator. The main specifications of the UPS are shown.
A rated input • • • 3 phases 200V, 50Hz
A rated output • • •3 phases 200V, 100kVA
Storage battery type • • •Sealed lead battery (MSE)
Blackout compensation time • • •3~60minutes
The main machine connected to UPS
1) The control system of the primary and the secondary cooling system, the air
circulation system for Shield cooling and their control system
2) The monitoring system of the heavy water system and light water system.
3) The circulating pump and control system of cryogenic circulation system and
the control system
4) The control system of the helium refrigerator
5) HVAC system of hot-cell
A2-8
6) The control panel and operation indication panel of the main control system
7) T0 rotor electrical motor
8) Others
(3) Experimental Facilities Circuit
The system to avoid the inflow of the high frequency noise from the power
supply system to the experimental device. To reduce noise flowing into the
experimental device, transformer bank are independent that of the systems which can
become a source of noise occurrence.
The main machine connected to the one only for the measurement vessel
1) The experimental device
2) The measuring machine of the in-cell monitor
(4) PPS System
Because high reliability is demanded, exclusive UPS is installed in the power
supply system of the PPS in the control room at 3rd floor. The input of UPS is
supported with a generator. The main specifications of the UPS are shown.
Rated input • • • 1 phase 200V, 50Hz
Rated output • • •1 phase 200/100V, 15kVA
Storage battery form • • •Sealed lead battery (MSE)
Blackout compensation time • • •10 minutes
The main machine (the machine concerned with radiation safety) connected to
the PPS circuit
1) Entrance control system of the PPS area
2) The PPS control panel
3) The control system of the neutron shutter.
1.4 Building Equipment
1.4.1 Introduction
Building equipment consists of the ventilation and air condition system,
pressurized air supply system and water supply and drainage system and etc. The
ventilation and air condition system adjusts the negative pressure, temperature and
humidity in radiation control areas. The pressurized air supply system is set in the air
compressor room at the first floor. The pressurize air is used to operate the valves and
dumpers in the instrument Halls. The water supply and drainage system provide water
to the Target Station Hall and Instrument Halls wherever, and drain water to the drain
tank in basement or directly to treatment room.
1.4.2 Ventilation and air condition

Ventilation and air condition system consists of the air supply system and
exhaust system. The air supply system includes the blower filter, chiller and heater.
The supply system removes the dust from intake air and adjusts temperature and
A2-9
humidity. The exhaust system includes the blower and filter. The exhaust system
reduces the dust in the exhaust from the radiation control area. These systems adjust
the balance of the supply and exhaust by dampers control to keep the pressure of the
radiation control area in negative.
The negative pressure levels in the Target Station and Instrument Halls are
categorized in 5 levels.
Level Ⅰ:-550 Pa, Target station.
Level Ⅱ: -440 Pa, Irradiated components handling room (Hot-cell).
Level Ⅲ: -250 Pa, Waste storage room, explosion-proof room
Level Ⅱ: -80 Pa, Service area, Basement, Hot-cell operation room
Level Ⅳ: -10 Pa, Instrument halls
1.4.3 Pressurized air supply system

Pressurized air supply system consists of compressors、pressure control valves,
accumulate tanks and so on. Pressurized air is supplied to somewhere in the Target
Station and Instrument Halls to operate the air operation valves of the neutron source
related systems and ventilation system. And the pressurized air is also supplied to the
experimental hall for cleaning.
Specification of the pressurized air supply system is as follows:
Pressure:
0.6 MPa for neutron source, experimental hall and cryogenic system
0.39 MPa for the ventilation system
1.4.4 Water supply and drain system

Water supply and drainage system consists of the piping, taps and sinks, catch
basin, pumps and tanks. Water from the filtration plant is introduced to the taps and
sinks, which are set in anywhere in the Target Station and Instrument Halls.
Waste water from radiation control area shall be contained in return flume and
pump to water treatment room. Double wall pipe shall be used in slab concrete for
pre-existing contamination. When leakage happens in helium vessel, the valves will
be open as required and flow to temporary tank in the basement.
A2-10

Physical Design and Technology Development of CSNS TS&NI For NTAC

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Physical Design and Technology Development of CSNS TS&NI For NTAC

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Physical Design and Technology Development of CSNS Target Station and Instruments

Physics Design and Technology

Development of CSNS Target Station

Second CSNS International Neutron Technology Advisory

Institute of High Energy Physics, Institute of Physics, CAS

2 NEUTRON INSTRUMENTS ........................................................... 115

3 EXPERIMENTAL CONTROL AND UTILITY.............................198

1.1 INTRODUCTION OF TARGET DESIGN

1.1.1 Description of target station

Table 1.1-1. Technical Design of CSNS target station

Target station systems include target system, moderators, reflector, shielding,

Table 1.1-2 target station systems constitution

1.1.2 CSNS Target station design

operators , instrument scientists and users.

Top concrete Shutters

TMR Helium Base plate

Fig. 1.1-1. Cutaway view of target station

Fig. 1.1-2. CSNS horizontal maintenance trolley

8.75m Maintenance Cell

Target Station Remote Handling

Fig. 1.1-3. Cutaway of target station and maintenance cells

Figures 1.1-4 provide detailed information on the configuration of the major

Auxiliary Service Area

Fig. 1.1-4. Layout of target station hall

1.1.3 Upgrade path

1.2 PHYSICAL WORKS OF CSNS TARGET STATION

1.2.1 TMR design & neutronics performance

1.2.1.1 Requirements from instruments

For design of neutron scattering instruments, it’s necessary to consider both

1.2.1.2 Calculation methods

employed in calculations to speed up the convergence of calculation. The

1.2.1.3 Geometry model

Table 1.2-1. Main parameters for baseline model

1.2.1.4 Neutron spectra

The neutron leakage spectra from moderators in different measurement (the

1.2.1.5 Neutron pulse shape

The calculated full width of half maximum(FWHM) of neutron pulse from

Fig. 1.2-4. FWHM of neutron pulse at beamline02 05 08 17

Fig. 1.2-5. neutron pulse shape from moderators at different energy.

1.2.1.6 Spatial distribution of neutron brightness

Fig. 1.2-7. Spatial distribution of neutron brightness from CHM (target

Fig. 1.2-8. Spatial distribution of neutron brightness from DWM (target

1.2.1.7 γ ray characteristics

1.2.2 Shielding analysis

1.2.2.1 The neutron source term

1.2.2.2 The Monte-Carlo simulation and discrete ordinates methods

1.2.2.3 The primary shielding design with DORT for CSNS TS

1.2.2.4 The sandwich structure of the CSNS TS

1.2.3 Activation, afterheat calculation and related shielding

Components 1 day 3 days 7 days 30 days 1 year

1.2.4 Radiation damage

1.2.4.1 DPA and gas production cross section

and tungsten. the dpa is defined as

values are 90, 40eV, respectively.

1.2.4.2 The damage evaluation of CSNS target

Particle intensity (1/cm2/proton/MeV)

1.2.5 Heat deposition calculation

Table 1.2-3. heat deposition in components of target station (/1.6GeV proton)

1.2.6. Neutronic performance measurement

1.2.6.1 TOF energy spectrum measurement

Fig. 1.2-19. The Li-glass scintillator in current model

The 3He detector TOF measurement system includes detector, electronics,

Fig. 1.2-20. The experimental setup of 3He detector TOF measurement

Inner size of moderator cell 12W12H50 T cm φ1510H cm 11W11H*50T cm